- Omron Industrial Automation Thailand

- Omron Industrial Automation Thailand
Cat. No. W367-E1-02
SYSMAC
CS1W-SLK11/21
SYSMAC LINK Units
CS1W-SLK11/21
SYSMAC LINK Units
Operation Manual
Revised June 2004
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
3
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
5
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
6
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1-3
SYSMAC LINK Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-4
Programming Devices and Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-5
Data Link Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-6
Message Service Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
SECTION 2
Unit Components and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-3
Mounting to Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-4
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
SECTION 3
Basic Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
3-1
SYSMAC LINK System Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
3-2
Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-3
Setting Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-4
Network Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-5
Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-6
Memory Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
SECTION 4
Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
4-2
Data Link Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
4-3
Data Link Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
4-4
Data Link Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
4-5
Creating Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
4-6
Data Link Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-7
Data Link Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-8
Controlling Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
4-9
Data Link Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-10 Data Link Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
4-11 Data Link Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
4-12 CX-Programmer Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
SECTION 5
Network Data Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
5-1
What is Network Interconnection? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
5-2
Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
5-3
Routing Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
SECTION 6
Message Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
6-1
About Data Read/Write Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
6-2
PLC Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
6-3
FINS Command/Response Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
SECTION 7
Remote Monitoring and Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7-1
Remote Programming and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
8-2
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
8-3
Polling Node Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
8-4
Node Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
SECTION 9
Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9-1
Replacing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
9-2
Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9-3
Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
SECTION 10
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10-1 Periodic Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
150
10-2 Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
10-3 Tools and Equipment Needed for Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Appendices
A
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
C
Related Auxiliary Area Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
D
CPU Bus Unit Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
E
DM Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
ix
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units and includes
the sections described below.
Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provide before
attempting to install and operate a SYSMAC LINK System including CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units.
Section 1 Introduction introduces the features and operations of the SYSMAC LINK Units.
Section 2 Unit Components and Switch Settings describes the names and functions of the SYSMAC LINK Unit components and switch settings.
Section 3 Basic Communications describes the token bus method of communications used in SYSMAC LINK Systems, as well as the basic settings necessary for operation.
Section 4 Data Links describes the operation of data links, procedures required to establish data
links, and methods of monitoring data link operations.
Section 5 Network Data Exchange provides the details of the data exchange functions of the CSseries PLCs via SYSMAC LINK Networks.
Section 6 Message Service describes the PLC ladder network instructions and FINS commands that
can be used to transfer data and control operation via a SYSMAC LINK System.
Section 7 Remote Monitoring and Programming provides information on remote programming and
monitoring.
Section 8 Troubleshooting provides information to help identify and correct errors that might occur.
Section 9 Unit Replacement describes the replacement procedure and provides cautions for Unit
replacement.
Section 10 Inspection and Maintenance contains information describing periodic inspections
required by the System.
Appendices contain information describing SYSMAC LINK Unit models, their dimensions, and area
allocations.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CS-series
SYSMAC LINK Units. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting
to set up or operate a SYSMAC LINK System.
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
4
Operating Environment Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
5
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
6
Conformance to EC Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
6-1
Applicable Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
6-2
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
xiii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, in order to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious
accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
xiv
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded
or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being
turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety
measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing the I/O memory area. Doing either of these without
confirming safety may result in injury.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
!WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to
protect against electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply or the backup power supply to the PLC
or the computer before attempting any of the following. Performing any of
the following with the power supply turned ON may lead to electrical
shock:
• Installing or removing the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, Inner Boards, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP or rotary switches.
xv
5
Application Precautions
• Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring.
• Connecting or disconnecting any connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or
the PLC or the system or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand
voltage tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result
in burning.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to
do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors completely.
• Be sure that the communications cable connectors and other items with
locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may
result in malfunction.
• Use special packing box when transporting the SYSMAC LINK Unit. Handle the product carefully so that no excessive vibration or impact is
applied to the product during transportation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable
or backup power supply cables.
• Separate the cables from the power lines or high-tension lines.
• Do not bend the cables beyond their natural bending radius.
• Do not pull on the cables.
xvi
6
Conformance to EC Directives
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the cables.
• Route cables inside conduits.
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object
in order to discharge any static build-up.
6
6-1
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives conform to the related EMC
standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or
machines. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC
standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the
customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel in which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform final checks to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility):
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
6-3
EN50082-2
EN61000-6-2
Conformance to EC Directives
The CS1W-SLK11 and CS1W-SLK21 SYSMAC LINK Units comply with EC
Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which these SYSMAC
LINK Units are used complies with EC directives, the SYSMAC LINK Units
must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
1. In order to conform with EC Directives, the SYSMAC LINK Units must be
installed within a control panel. Use an SA20-712 (made by NITTO ELECTRIC WORKS) or a similar model.
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power
supplies used for the communications and I/O power supplies.
3. SYSMAC LINK Units complying with EC Directives also conform to the
Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2). When a SYSMAC LINK Unit is
built into a machine, however, noise can be generated by switching devices using relay outputs and cause the overall machine to fail to meet the
Standards, particularly with radiated emission for 10-m regulations. The
customer must, therefore, take measures to ensure and perform final
checks to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC
standards.
xvii
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the features and operations of the SYSMAC LINK Units.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1-2-1
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-2-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
SYSMAC LINK Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-3-1
Basic Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-3-2
Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1-3-3
Network Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1-3-4
Message Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-3-5
Remote Programming and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-3-6
RAS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Programming Devices and Support Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-4-1
Basic Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
1-4-2
CX-Programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Data Link Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-5-1
Manually Setting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-5-2
Automatically Setting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Message Service Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1
Overview
The SYSMAC LINK is an FA network that can send and receive large data
packets flexibly and easily among the OMRON CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, CV-series, C1000H, C1000HF, C2000H, and CQM1H-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs), as well as IBM PC/AT or compatible computers.
The SYSMAC LINK supports data links that enable data sharing and a message service that enables sending and receiving data when required. Data
link words can be freely set to create a flexible data link system and effectively
use memory areas.
The network is connected using coaxial cable or optical fiber cable.
Coaxial System (Coaxial Cable)
C1000H-SLK21-V1 IBM PC/AT or
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24 CV500-SLK21
CS1W-SLK21
SYSMAC LINK Unit SYSMAC LINK Unit compatible
SYSMAC LINK Unit SYSMAC LINK Unit
C1000H,
CVM1,
CS-series
C1000HF,
C200HX/HG/HE
CV-series
PLC
PLC
C2000H
Coaxial cable
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
3G8C2-SLK21-E
SYSMAC LINK
Support Board
3G8C2-SLK21-E
SYSMAC LINK
Support Board
Optical System (Optical Fiber Cable)
CS1W-SLK11
SYSMAC LINK Unit
CS-series PLC
24-VDC
Backup Power
Supply
100-VAC
Backup Power
Supply
Internetwork Connections
C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
SYSMAC LINK Unit
C200HX/HG/HE
CVM1,
CV-series PLC
C1000H-SLK11
SYSMAC LINK Unit
C1000H, C1000HF,
C2000H
Optical fiber cable
(Daisy-chain
connection)
C200H-APS03
Power Supply
Unit
C1000H-APS01
Power Supply
Unit
Communications across bridges or gateways can include up to three networks, including the local network. A CS-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC can
be used as the bridge or gateway to easily and economically create networks
controlling multiple lines.
Network 1 (local network)
SYSMAC LINK
2
CV500-SLK11
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Network 2
Network 3
Controller Link, Ethernet, SYS- Controller Link, Ethernet, SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, etc. MAC LINK, SYSMAC NET, etc.
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features
1-2
Section 1-2
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features
CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units are equipped with a variety of special features
including some developed from those incorporated by the C-series SYSMAC
LINK Unit. These features allow PLCs in a SYSMAC LINK Network to communicate with or automatically exchange data with other PLCs in the same Network and to communicate with interconnected Networks.
High Speed, Reliability,
and Flexibility
The specialized communications LSIs used in all SYSMAC LINK Units deliver
high speed, reliability, and flexibility in an advanced data link system, while
optical fiber cable systems provide high-speed communications with unparalleled immunity to noise.
In the event of an error or failure in the polling node, another node automatically takes over management of the SYSMAC LINK System without stopping
the entire network. The CX-Net within the CX-Programmer can monitor and/or
program PLCs anywhere in the network via the SYSMAC LINK System.
Distributed Control with
Data Links
The data link function transfers data to and from other nodes automatically,
establishing simple but powerful peer-to-peer links between nodes. Data links
can be generated automatically or the user can use the flexibility of manually
generating data links to eliminate unused link words, improve data link I/O
response time, and to even create several data link groups in one network.
The data link communications cycle time can be fixed at a constant value, so
even simultaneous remote programming/monitoring and NETWORK READ/
WRITE instructions (RECV(98)/SEND(90)) execution have no effect on the
data link I/O response time.
The data link function allows data exchange not only between PLCs but also
between PLCs and host computers in the network, making it possible to
develop communications software with ease.
Active Communications
1,2,3...
Communications can also be programmed using ladder-diagram instructions
(SEND(90), RECV(98), and CMND(490)) to facilitate communications with
other PLCs and host computers on an as-needed basis. Use of these instructions enables the following:
1. Broadcast transmissions
2. Response monitoring time setting (response time-out setting)
3. Transmit retry setting
4. Enabling/disabling responses
Internetwork
Communications
Routing tables can be set up in network PLCs so that communications are
possible with interconnecting networks or networks one network away from
the local network. This includes both bridging to other SYSMAC LINK Networks or passing gateways to other OMRON networks, including those in
SYSMAC NET Link Systems or SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems.
Remote Access
The CX-Net within the CX-Programmer can access PLCs on the local network, on adjacent networks, or on networks one removed from the local network, including Controller Link and Ethernet Networks. Access can be used to
monitor operation and/or manipulate data and programs.
RAS Functions
SYSMAC LINK Units are equipped with three RAS functions (RAS is an acronym for reliability, availability, and serviceability). The Polling Node Backup
and Failed Node Bypass (optical systems only) functions prevent the network
from failing when one Unit fails. The Internode Echo Test function aids in communications troubleshooting.
Remote monitoring of the network’s operating status and error logs also aids
in troubleshooting and quick correction of communications problems.
3
Section 1-2
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features
1-2-1
Standard Models
SYSMAC LINK Units
Applicable
PLCs
CS-series
PLCs
(CS1-H, CS1)
Unit
classification
Name
Transmission
path
CPU Bus Unit
Coaxial SYSMAC
LINK Unit
Coaxial cable
Optical SYSMAC
LINK Unit
Optical fiber
cable
Communications
Model
Data links (manually set or auto- CS1W-SLK21
matically set), messages (through
SEND(90), RECV(98), and
CS1W-SLK11
CMND(490) instructions)
SYSMAC LINK Programming Devices
Product
CX-Net (within CX-Programmer)
1-2-2
Specifications
Setting manually set data links, starting/stopping data links, reading
network status, reading error logs, setting routing tables, testing networks, changing network parameters settings
Note The CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit cannot be directly connected to SYSMAC Support Software.
Model
[email protected]@E
Specifications
General Specifications
Conform to the specifications of the CS Series.
SYSMAC LINK Unit Specifications
Item
Specifications
CS1W-SLK11
Model
CS1W-SLK21
Type
Unit classification
Coaxial
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Applicable PLCs
Max. number of Units
CS-series PLCs
4 Units max. (total Coaxial Units and Optical Units)
Mounting position
Allowable unit number settings
Four slots on the CPU Racks and CS-series Expansion Racks
0 to F
CPU Unit data CPU Bus Unit
exchange areas Area
25 words/Unit
SYSMAC Link Unit to CPU Unit:
Data link status, network participation status, error information, etc.
Words allocated to CPU
Bus Units in
DM Area
Settings
Indicators
Optical fiber
100 words/Unit (Only first word of the 100 words is used.)
CPU Unit to SYSMAC LINK Unit:
Polling/polled node setting, starting data links, data link mode (automatic/manual) settings, number of data link words for automatic data links, etc.
Rotary switch:
Unit number
Rotary switches: Node addresses
LEDs: 9 on Optical Unit, 8 on Coaxial Unit
Coaxial and Optical Units:
Running, communications error, CPU Unit error, network participation, polling, send,
receive, data link active
Optical Unit Only: Power ON
Front panel connectors
BNC connector
Effect on CPU Unit cycle time
0.2 ms
Requires an additional 1.5 ms + (No. of words transferred x 0.001 ms) when data links
are used.
Requires additional event processing time when servicing messages.
480 mA at 5 V DC
470 mA at 5 V DC
Current consumption (supplied
from Power Supply Unit)
Dimensions
4
35 × 130 × 101 mm (W x H x D)
Two optical fiber connectors
Power supply terminal block (24 V DC)
Section 1-2
SYSMAC LINK Unit Features
Item
Weight
302 g (including F adapter)
Standard accessories
F Adapter, insulating cover
Specifications
332 g (including cable bracket)
Cable bracket
SYSMAC LINK Communications Specifications
Item
Specifications
Type
Communications functions
Coaxial
Data links, messages
Communications method
Transmission method
Token bus (N:N)
Manchester encoding
Modulation
Synchronization
Baseband
Flag synchronization (HDLC frames)
Transmission path
Baud rate and maximum
transmission distance
Bus
2 Mbps (fixed)
Maximum transmission distance: 1 km
Daisy chain
2 Mbps (fixed)
Maximum transmission distance: 10 km
Maximum distance between nodes:
Crimp cut: 800 m, adhesive polishing: 1 km
(The maximum distance between nodes is
determined by the connector cable processing method.)
Transmission path
Coaxial cable (5C-2V)
2-carrier hard-plastic-clad quartz optical
fiber cable
Node connection
BNC connector
Special full-lock connector (a half-lock connector can also be used)
Number of nodes
Number of data link words
62 max.
Send words per node: 508 words max. (254 words in CIO Area + 254 words in DM Area)
Data link words (send and receive) that can be created in a single SYSMAC LINK Unit:
2,966 words max. (CIO Area + DM Area)
Automatic settings: CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 (Data Link Area), D00000 to D00127 (DM
Area)
Manual settings: CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 (entire CIO), entire DM Area (D00000 to D32767)
When creating manually set data link tables using CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 or earlier, the
words that can be set by the user are limited to the same words as for CVM1/CV, as follows:
CIO Area: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
DM Area: D00000 to D24575
552 bytes max. (including header)
Data link words
Message length
Optical fiber
RAS functions
Automatic polling node backup, self-diagnostics (startup hardware check), internode
testing, broadcast test (using FINS command), watchdog timer, error log
Error control
Manchester encoding check, error (CRC-CCITT) detection = X16 + X12 + X5 + 1
Automatic polling node backup, self-diagnostics (startup hardware check), internode
testing, broadcast test (using FINS command), watchdog timer, error log, failed
node bypass
5
Section 1-3
SYSMAC LINK Unit Functions
Data Link Specifications
Type of data link
Number of data link nodes
Automatic settings
62 nodes max. (2 nodes min.)
Number of words per node (sending
and receiving)
Areas supporting CIO Area
data links
2,966 words max. (CIO Area + DM Area total)
DM Area
Starting data link
word
Number of words
sent per node
Allocating data
link words
Data Link Area:
CIO 1000 to
CIO 1063
Select from the
following: CIO
Area only, DM
Area only, CIO +
DM Areas
CIO Area
D00000 to
D00127
CIO 1000
DM Area
D00000
CIO Area
Either 4, 8, 16, or 32 words (same for
each node)
DM Area
Either 8, 16, 32, or 64 words (same for
each node)
CIO Area
Each node has the same number of
data link words and words are allocated to nodes in the order of node
addresses.
DM Area
Manual settings
CIO Area (CIO 0000 to CIO 6143)
DM Area (D00000 to D32767)
Manual settings can be made between
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
Manual settings can be made between
D00000 to D32767
0 to 254 words (separate for each
node)
The number of data link words and the
order of allocation can be set for each
node. The same order of allocation
must be used for both the CIO Area
and the DM Area.
Message Communications Specifications
Instructions
Application
SEND(90)/RECV(98)
Data sending and receiving
CMND(490)
Reading and writing data at other nodes
(e.g., reading/writing file memory), controlling operation (e.g., controller operating modes), reading error logs, etc.
Message contents
Commands for sending and receiving
data
Any supported FINS commands
Local node to PLC to PLC
partner node PLC to computer
Possible
Possible (requires program that returns
responses from the computer)
Possible (requires program that receives
responses at the computer)
SEND(90): 1:1 or 1:N (broadcast)
RECV(98): 1:1
Possible
Possible (requires program that returns
responses from the computer)
Possible (requires program that receives
responses at the computer)
1:1 or 1:N (broadcast)
256 words max. (512 bytes)
542 bytes max.
Computer to PLC
Local node: partner node
Number of words sent and
received
1-3
SYSMAC LINK Unit Functions
This section explains the settings and functions for the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
For details, refer to the relevant sections.
1-3-1
Basic Settings
Perform the basic settings to use the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Node Address
(See pages 18 and 35)
Set the address of the local node in the network using the rotary switches on
the front of the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Unit Number
(See pages 18 and 35)
Up to 16 CPU Bus Units (SYSMAC LINK Units, Controller Link Units, Ethernet
Units, Serial Communication Units, etc.) can be mounted on one PLC. Of
these, however, only a maximum of four Units may be SYSMAC LINK Units.
6
Section 1-3
SYSMAC LINK Unit Functions
Set the unit number of each Unit manually from between 0 to F Hex (0 to 15)
using the rotary switches on the front of the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Network Parameters
(See page 36)
The following parameters are set with the Support Software (CX-Net within
the CX-Programmer).
• Communications cycle time
• Maximum node address
• Number of polled nodes
• Maximum number of frames
1-3-2
Data Links
SYSMAC LINK Units can be used to create data links between PLCs and
computers on the same network. The data links support the following functions: Automatic settings (communications using data link words with settings
made automatically from settings made in PLC memory), and manual settings
(communications using data link tables with settings made using the CX-Net
within the CX-Programmer).
Automatic Settings
(See page 49)
Manual Settings
(See page 49)
The areas to be used in creating the data links (CIO Area and/or DM Area)
and the number of data link words for each node are set in parameters in the
DM Area.
• Data Link Table Settings
The common link parameters and refresh parameters required by data
links are set using Support Software.
Common link parameters:The same for all nodes
Refresh parameters:
Unique to each node
• Data Link Area Settings
The data areas (i.e., CIO Area and/or DM Area) to be used in the data links
are specified in the common link parameters.
• Number of Words in Data Links
The number of data link words for each node is specified in the common
link parameters.
• Data Link Node Settings
The nodes to be linked to the local node are specified in the refresh parameters. It is possible to use these settings to set multiple groups within a single network. The settings are made for each node individually.
1-3-3
Network Data Exchange
The SYSMAC LINK Unit can send and receive data by connecting to other
networks of the same type or to different networks.
• Bridges: Commands can be used to send and receive between SYSMAC
LINK Networks.
• Gateways: Commands can be used to send and receive between networks with different communications protocols, such as Controller Link
and Ethernet.
Commands and data can be sent and received across a maximum of three
networks (including the local network).
7
Programming Devices and Support Software
Section 1-4
Routing Tables (See page 86)
Routing tables are set using the Support Software to specify paths for sending
and receiving data between networks. The routing tables consist of the following two tables.
• Local Network Table: Set the combination of unit numbers and network
addresses for each Communications Unit.
• Relay Network Table: Set the communications path between the sender
and receiver.
1-3-4
Message Service
The SYSMAC LINK Units support SEND(90) and RECV(98) instructions for
reading data from and writing data to other node PLCs. The SYSMAC LINK
Units also support CMND(490) instructions for sending and receiving FINS
commands that control PLCs and CPU Bus Units. Using these instructions, it
is possible to control complicated functions without creating a communications program.
Refer to SECTION 6 Message Service for details.
1-3-5
Remote Programming and Monitoring
Remote programming and monitoring can be performed between SYSMAC
LINK, Controller Link, and Ethernet Networks. A maximum of three levels of
network communications (including the local network) are supported.
Refer to SECTION 7 Remote Monitoring and Programming for details.
1-3-6
RAS Functions
The SYSMAC LINK Unit supports RAS functions to help protect the network
and recover from errors.
Internode Test
Communications between the local node and a specified node within the network can be tested. The test settings are made using the Support Software.
Broadcast Test
All the nodes within a specified network can be tested using the Support Software broadcast test function.
Error Log
(See page 137)
If an error occurs in the Unit, the time of the error and the error contents are
logged in EEPROM within the Unit. The logged error information can be read
using the Support Software.
Polling Node Backup
(See page 143)
If an error occurs in the polling node, the Unit at another node automatically
becomes the polling node and rebuilds the network.
Node Bypass
(See page 143)
If a backup power supply is used with an Optical SYSMAC LINK System, any
node that goes down will be automatically bypassed, preventing the entire
network from going down.
1-4
Programming Devices and Support Software
The CX-Programmer is needed to use a SYSMAC LINK Network.
8
Section 1-4
Programming Devices and Support Software
1-4-1
Basic Programming
One of the following Programming Devices can be connected to the CPU Unit
to automatically set data links or use the message service.
Programming
Console
CPU Unit
Startup node
or
SYSMAC LINK
+
CX-Programmer
Software switches (DM Area)
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
The following operations are possible.
• Selecting manual or automatic setting for data links.
• Setting the data links for automatic data link allocation (software
switches).
• Starting/stopping data links (Start Bit: ON/OFF)
• Programming the message service.
• Reading (monitoring) network status.
1-4-2
CX-Programmer
The CX-Net operations within the CX-Programmer are required when using
manually set data links, or when setting or monitoring detailed settings of the
SYSMAC LINK Unit. This Support Software can be used with a CS-series
PLC and is ideal for the following applications.
• Setting manual data links (i.e., creating and storing data link tables).
• Starting/stopping data links.
• Reading (monitoring) network status.
• Reading error logs.
• Setting routing tables.
• Testing the Network.
• Changing network parameters.
Using a Personal Computer as a Peripheral Device
+
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
CX-Net in
CX-Programmer
CS-series PLC
SYSMAC
Nodes
LINK Unit
RS-232C
Transmissions
CPU Unit
Setting data link tables
9
Section 1-5
Data Link Procedures
Using a Personal Computer as a Node
IBM PC/AT or compatible
CX-Net in
CX-Programmer
+
SYSMAC LINK
Support Board
Setting data link tables
Software
External
appearance
CX-Programmer
Note
Model
[email protected]@E
(1) The CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units cannot be directly connected to
SYSMAC Support Software.
(2) For further details about the CX-Programmer, refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual.
(3) The CX-Net in the CX-Programmer cannot set data link tables for the
C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21. Refer to 9-3 Using the C200H-SLK21
or C1000H-SLK21 for details.
1-5
1-5-1
Data Link Procedures
Manually Setting Data Links
When the data link mode is set for manual data link table creation, the data
link tables can be input using the CX-Net within the CX-Programmer. Use the
following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
a. Mount the Units to
the PLCs.
Method
---
b. Wire the Network.
c. Connect terminating resistance
--Use C100H-TER01
Terminator.
Nodes
All nodes
Page
18
All nodes
19
Coaxial systems only.
End nodes on the network: Connect Terminator
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
a. Set the unit number.
b. Set the node
address.
10
Method
Use the front rotary
switches.
Use the front rotary
switches.
Nodes
Page
CS-series, CVM1, and 18
CV-series PLCs only
All nodes
Section 1-5
Data Link Procedures
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Turn ON the power to
the PLC.
Method
---
Nodes
All nodes
Page
---
Nodes
Page
4. Connect the Programming Device.
Contents
Method
Connect the Program- Use the special conming Console or Sup- nection cable.
port Software.
CS-series, CVM1, and 8
CV-series PLCs
5. Create I/O tables.
Contents
Input the I/O tables.
Method
Use the SYSMAC
Support Software or
Programming Console.
Nodes
Page
CS-series, CVM1, and --CV-series PLCs only
6. Set the data link mode.
Contents
Set data link mode to
manual.
Method
Use the SYSMAC
Support Software or
Programming Console.
Nodes
Page
Data link startup node 45
only
The node that is used
to start the data link is
called the startup
node. It is necessary
to decide beforehand
which node will be the
startup node.
Note Be sure that the data link mode in the data link parameters in the DM
Area is set to 00 when using manually set data links.
7. Register the data link tables by making the following settings for each
node.
Contents
First data link status word
Data link nodes
Area First data link sta1
tus words
Numbers of data
link words
Area
2
Method
Use the CX-Net
within the CX-Programmer.
Nodes
All nodes within the
network
Delete from the data
link tables all nodes
that are not in a data
link.
Page
46, 67
First data link status words
Numbers of data
link words
Note Offsets are used to control where data is placed within the receive area.
11
Section 1-5
Data Link Procedures
8. Start the data links.
Contents
Start the data links.
Method
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (see
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
the user program, the
CX-Net within the CXProgrammer.
Nodes
Page
Data link startup node 55, 67
(The Start Bit can be
turned ON in more
then one node to
make sure the data
links start even when
the startup node is
down.)
Note (a) Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS Series: Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
(b) The data links will not start if there is an error in the data link tables in the startup node.
9. Stop the data links.
Contents
Stop the data links.
Method
Nodes
Page
Switch the Data link
Any node that is active 55, 67
Start/Stop Bit (listed
in the data link
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
the user program, the
CX-Net within the CXProgrammer.
Note Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS Series: Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
1-5-2
Automatically Setting Data Links
Data link tables can be automatically created by setting the data link mode to
automatic data link table creation. Use the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
Method
Nodes
Page
a. Mount the Units to
the PLCs.
---
All nodes
18
b. Wire the Network.
c. Connect terminating resistance
--Use C100H-TER01
Terminator.
All nodes
19
Coaxial systems only.
End nodes on the network: Connect Terminator
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
a. Set the unit number.
b. Set the node
address.
Method
Use the front rotary
switches.
Use the front rotary
switches.
Nodes
Page
CS-series, CVM1, and 18
CV-series PLCs only
All nodes
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Turn ON the power to
the PLC.
12
Method
---
Nodes
All nodes
Page
---
Section 1-5
Data Link Procedures
4. Connect the Programming Device.
Contents
Method
Connect the Program- Use the special conming Console or Sup- nection cable.
port Software.
Nodes
Page
CS-series, CVM1, and 8
CV-series PLCs only
5. Create I/O tables.
Contents
Create the I/O tables.
Method
Use the SYSMAC
Support Software or
Programming Console.
Nodes
Page
CS-series, CVM1, and --CV-series PLCs only
6. Set the parameters for automatic data link creation.
Contents
a. Set the data link
mode to automatic.
Method
Use the SYSMAC
Support Software or
Programming Console.
b. Set the number of
data link words.
Nodes
Page
Data link startup node
45
only
The node that is used to
start the data link is
called the startup node.
It is necessary to decide
beforehand which node
will be the startup node.
Data link startup node
only
7. Start the data links.
Contents
Start the data links.
Method
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
or the user program.
Nodes
Page
Data link startup node 55, 67
(The Start Bit can be
turned ON in more
then one node to
make sure the data
links start even when
the startup node is
down.)
Note Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS Series: Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
8. Stop the data links.
Contents
Stop the data links.
Method
Switch the Data link
Start/Stop Bit (listed
below) from OFF to
ON using either the
Programming Device,
or the user program.
Nodes
Page
Any node that is active 55, 67
in the data link
Note (a) Data link Start/Stop Bit (N= unit number):
CS Series: Word 0 of DM30000 + 100 × N
(b) The data links will not start if there is an error in the data link tables in the startup node. Data links can be started and stopped
using the CX-Net within the CX-Programmer.
13
Section 1-6
Message Service Procedure
1-6
Message Service Procedure
The following steps outline the basic procedure for using the message service.
1,2,3...
1. Install and wire the Units.
Contents
a. Mount the Units to the PLCs.
Remarks
---
b. Wire the Network.
--c. Connect terminating resistance Coaxial systems only.
Page
18
19
2. Prepare for communications.
Contents
a. Set the unit number.
Remarks
CS-series, CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs only
b. Set the node address.
---
Page
18
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Contents
Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Remarks
---
Page
---
4. Create the I/O tables.
Contents
Create the I/O tables.
Remarks
CS-series, CVM1, and CV-series
PLCs only
Page
---
5. Register routing tables if using internetwork connections.
Contents
a. Set the local network table
---
b. Set the relay network table
---
Remarks
Page
86
Remarks
Page
6. Create the user program.
Contents
a. Prepare the send and receive
data in memory.
Stored in the memory areas of the 92
source node
b. Prepare the control data for the
communications instruction.
c. Check the conditions for executing the SEND/RECV or
CMND instruction.
d. Execute the SEND/RECV or
CMND instruction.
e. Execute other instructions are
required for the results of the
communications instruction,
(e.g., retry or error processing
if an error occurs).
14
The standard input conditions are
the Active Node Flags for the
source and destination nodes, and
the Port Enabled Flag.
--The standard input condition is the
Port Error Flags.
CS-series PLCs have 8 communications ports. When 9 or more
communications instructions are
executed at the same time, exclusive control is necessary.
SECTION 2
Unit Components and Switch Settings
The names and functions of the SYSMAC LINK Unit components and switch settings are described in this section.
2-1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-1-1
Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
2-1-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-3
Mounting to Backplanes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-4
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2-4-1
Coaxial Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2-4-2
Optical Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2-4-3
Backup Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
15
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1
Nomenclature
This section describes the names and components of the SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
2-1-1
Component Names and Functions
This section describes the names and functions of the SYSMAC LINK Unit
components.
CS1W-SLK11 Optical SYSMAC LINK Units
Indicators
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
Unit number switch
One rotary switch. The unit number is set in single-digit
hexadecimal for the network to which the PLC is connected.
Node address switches
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
SYSMAC LINK Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
Optical connectors
Connectors to connect to the SYSMAC LINK Network communications
cable (optical fiber cable).
Power Supply Terminal Block
Connect the backup battery for the node bypass function.
CS1W-SLK21 Coaxial SYSMAC LINK Units
Indicators
LED indicators that display the Unit and network status.
Unit number switch
One rotary switch. The unit number is set in single-digit
hexadecimal for the network to which the PLC is connected.
Node address switches
Two rotary switches. The node address of the Unit on the
SYSMAC LINK Network is set in 2-digit decimal.
Coaxial connector
Connects to the SYSMAC LINK network communications coaxial cable.
16
Section 2-1
Nomenclature
2-1-2
Indicators
The status of the SYSMAC LINK Units is shown by the indicators listed below.
Optical SYSMAC LINK
Unit (CS1W-SLK11)
Indicator name
Color
Condition
Coaxial SYSMAC LINK
Unit (CS1W-SLK21)
Meaning
RUN
Green
Lit
Not lit
Unit is operating normally.
Watchdog timer error has occurred.
P/S
(power supply ON,
CS1W-SLK11 only)
ERC (communications error)
Green
Lit
Power is being supplied from the backup power supply.
Not lit
Power is not being supplied from the backup power supply.
Red
Lit
Communications error has occurred, node address setting is incorrect,
or same node address has been set twice.
ERH (PLC error)
Red
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
None of the above errors has occurred.
No I/O table has been set or PLC CPU, PLC model, PLC version, PLC
interface, EEPROM, unit number setting, or a unit number duplication
error has occurred.
None of the above errors has occurred.
INS (Network inclusion)
Orange
Lit
Not lit
Unit is part of Network.
Unit is not part of Network.
M/S (polling node)
Orange
Lit
Not lit
Unit is polling node.
Unit is not part of Network or is polled node.
SD (send)
Orange
Lit
Not lit
Unit is sending data.
Unit is not sending data.
RD (receive)
Orange
Lit
Unit is receiving data.
LNK (data link)
Orange
Not lit
Lit
Unit is not receiving data
Unit is part of active data link.
Flashing
Data link error has occurred.
Rapid flash- Data link table communications cycle time is too short.
ing
Not lit
Note
Unit is not part of active data link.
If the Unit is participating in the network, the SD and RD indicators will light
when sending and receiving the token.
17
Section 2-2
Switch Settings
2-2
Switch Settings
The SYSMAC LINK Unit provides rotary switches on the front panel with
which to set the node address (“NODE NO.”) and unit number. You must turn
OFF the PLC before setting the rotary switches. If you have changed the settings when the PLC is not turned OFF, you must restart the SYSMAC LINK
Unit or the PLC to use the new settings.
Switch Positions
The switches are positioned as shown in the following diagram.
Set the unit number with SW1. Set the node address with SW2 and SW3. The
setting ranges are given in the following table.
Settings Values
Switches
Unit number
(UNIT No.)
Node address
(NODE No.
×101, ×100)
2-3
Range
0 to F Hex
01 to 62 decimal
Remarks
Each Unit in the PLC must
have a unique unit number.
Each node on the network
must have a unique address.
Page
35
35
Mounting to Backplanes
Up to a total of four SYSMAC LINK Units (coaxial and optical) can be
mounted on the CPU Rack or CS-series Expansion Racks. SYSMAC LINK
Units cannot be mounted on C200H Expansion Racks or Slave Racks.
Note
18
Tighten the screws on the Backplane to a torque of 0.9 N • m.
Tighten the mounting screws on the Units to a torque of 0.4 N • m.
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
CPU Rack
(CS1W-BC103, CS1W-BC083, CS1W-BC053, CS1W-BC033, CS1W-BC023)
CPU Rack
SYSMAC LINK Units can be mounted to the
2/3/5/8/10 slots shown in the diagram on the right.
2/3/5/8/10 slots
CS-series Expansion Racks
(CS1W-BI108, CS1W-BI083, CS1W-BI053, CS1W-BI033)
Mount to up to four
of these slots.
CS1 Expansion Rack
SYSMAC LINK Units can be mounted to the
3/5/8/10 slots shown in the diagram on the right.
3/5/8/10 slots
C200H Expansion Rack
C200H Expansion I/O Rack
SYSMAC LINK Units cannot be
mounted to Expansion I/O slots.
Note
2-4
PS:
Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
Up to 16 CPU Bus Units may be installed to on PLC.
Cable Connections
SYSMAC LINK Units can be connected with either coaxial cable or optical
fiber cable. This section describes the procedures required to connect these
cables.
2-4-1
Coaxial Units
This section describes the procedures required to connect SYSMAC LINK
Units with coaxial cables.
Required Components
1,2,3...
1. Coaxial cable and Connectors:
Use the 5C-2V coaxial cable designed for indoor use. Install connectors on
each end of the cable. Cables must be continuous. No intervening cable
connectors or breaks are permitted. OMRON recommends the following
cables and connectors.
2. F Adapters (C1000H-CE001):
Coaxial cables are connected to the SYSMAC LINK Units via F Adapters.
One F Adapter is included as an accessory with SYSMAC LINK Units that
use coaxial cables (CV500-SLK21).
3. Terminator (C1000H-TER01):
Two Terminator units (sold separately) are required, one for the F Adapter
at each end of the network.
19
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Connection Procedure
The connection procedure is described briefly below.
1,2,3...
1. Install connectors on each end of the cables.
2. Connect Terminator to the F Adapter at each end of the network (i.e., to the
unused connectors at the last Unit on each end). Hold the connector in one
hand and press the resistance into it firmly with the other.
3. Connect the F Adapters to the SYSMAC LINK Units by firmly pushing the
adapter onto the coaxial connector on the Unit and turning the locking ring
to the right until it locks. Start at one end of the network and connect the F
Adapters to the other end in order.
F Adapter
Connector
Terminator
Terminator
5C-2V coaxial cables
Cable Connection
1,2,3...
1. Firmly press the F-Adapter into the Unit, and turn the locking ring to the
right until it locks.
Turn locking ring to
the right.
20
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
2. Place an insulation cover over the F Adapter.
Insulation cover
3. Any bends in the coaxial cable must be 45 mm in radius or greater (six
times the outer diameter of the cable). When laying the cable, make bends
of 110 mm in radius or greater (15 times the outer diameter of the cable).
Radius
45 mm minimum
Note
(1) Before connecting or removing the coaxial cable, always touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your body.
(2) Always make sure the power is OFF before connecting the coaxial cable.
(3) Insert the coaxial connectors firmly. Also, be sure that the coaxial cable
is locked before use.
Attaching Connectors to Coaxial Cable
Assemble the connector parts as shown below.
Contact clip
Body
Sleeve
Ferule
Contact
Approx. 24.3 mm
A hand crimp tool (CR-H-1130 by Dai-ichi Denshi Kogyo) is required when
crimping.
21
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
1,2,3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
LA mm = L mm − 12 mm
Approx. 24.5 mm
Approx. 24.5 mm
L
Cable
LA
(Unit: mm)
2. Remove 15 mm of the outer covering. Be careful not to damage or to distort the braiding.
15 mm
3. Insert the ferrule as shown below.
Ferrule
Cable
4. Spread the tip of the braiding, and insert the sleeve. Using the trimming
tool, push in the sleeve flange forcefully until it fits flush with the braiding.
Sleeve
Ferrule
Shield
Ferrule
Sleeve
5. Align A of the central conductor polyethylene projecting towards the outside of the trimming tool with the outside of the tool as shown below and
then cut the polyethylene.
B
Blade
Ferrule
C
Trimming tool
Conductor
A
Shield
Sleeve
22
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
6. Using your fingertips, press down on B on the trimming tool blade, forcing
the blade into the polyethylene, and twist several times. Continuing to
press down on B, withdraw in the direction of arrow D as shown below.
B
D
Conductor
7. Use scissors to cut off any protruding braiding as shown below.
8. Insert the contact into the contact crimp adapter, and set them inside the
crimp tool die. Insert the cable central conductor into the contact hole until
the severed face of the polyethylene meets the contact guard. Firmly grasp
the crimp tool handle and crimp.
9. Insert the completed contact subassembly into the body. Gently rotate and
press until the contact wings enter the insulator cavity, and align the contact tip with the insulator tip. After inserting the contact wings into the cavity, rotate the cable and the body until the body is crimped.
Contact
subassembly
Body
Insulator
23
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
10. Open the crimp tool handle, hold the tip of the body to the body stopper as
shown below, and close the handle until the ratchet can no longer turn.
Align the body hole with the hexagonal part of the die and crimp. A correct
crimp should resemble the diagram below.
Body stopper
Crimp height
Cable
Checks After Attaching
the Connector to the
Coaxial Cable
Body
Check that the body crimp is correct. If you crimp without holding the tip of the
body to the body stopper, the crimp will be partway along the body as shown
in the diagram on the right.
Wrong
OK
Check that the contact tip is in the same position as the open mouth of the
connector.
Body
Using a tester, check the following:
• Are the central conductor and the braiding insulated in the plug shell on
the coaxial cable connector?
• Are the plug shells conducting through the connectors at both ends of the
coaxial cable?
• Are the central conductors conducting through the connectors at both
ends of the coaxial cable?
24
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Provide a space between the bottom of the Unit and the cable as shown
below to ensure a suitable bend radius.
200
137
(Unit: mm)
Note
2-4-2
Separate the coaxial cable from other power lines and high-voltage lines to
prevent noise.
Optical Units
The following devices are required for the Optical SYSMAC LINK Network.
Required Components
Optical Fiber Cables
Use the following adhesive-polished Optical Fiber Cables (Hard Plastic-clad
Fiber: H-PCF).
Name
H-PCF cables
Black
Orange
Specifications
10 m
Model
S3200-HCCB101
50 m
100 m
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
500 m
1,000 m
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCB103
10 m
50 m
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
100 m
500 m
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
1,000 m
S3200-HCCO103
25
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Note The Optical Fiber Cable model numbers are as follows:
S3200-H(((((((
Tensioner option
None: Standard (with tension member)
N:
Without tension member
Cable length
(((
A B
(A/10) x 10B m
Cable color
B:
Black
O:
Orange
Cable specification
L:
With power supply line
C:
Without power supply line
Type
B:
C:
Cord
Cable
Connectors
Note
Name
Connector
Model
S3200-COCF2071
(See note 1.)
S3200-COCF2571
(See note 1.)
Specifications
Use to connect a cable to a node.
(Full-lock connector for crimp-cut cable.)
Use to connect a cable to a node.
(Half-lock connector for crimp-cut cable.)
Inline Adapter
S3200-COIAT2000
Use to connect or extend cables.
(Use one adapter for each connection.)
(1) Production of S3200-COCF2011 (full-lock) and S3200-COCF2511 (halflock) Connectors has been stopped. Use the above Connectors as replacements.
(2) Either full-lock or half-lock connectors can be used in a SYSMAC LINK
Network, but we recommend full-lock connectors to prevent accidental
disconnections during operation.
(3) The maximum distance between nodes is slightly shorter for connectors
with crimp-cut cables compared to connectors assembled with adhesive.
Also, the maximum distance is reduced due to extension loss when Inline
Adapters are used to extend cables.
Optical Fiber Cable with
Connectors
The following adhesive-polished Optical Fiber Cables are available with Connectors already attached.
Specifications
Length
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-COCF2011
5m
ß
10 m
S3200-COCF2011
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m
26
Model
S3200-CN201-20-20
S3200-CN501-20-20
S3200-CN102-20-20
S3200-CN152-20-20
S3200-CN202-20-20
S3200-CN-20-20
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Specifications
Length
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-COCF2011
5m
ß
10 m
S3200-COCF2511
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m
Optical Fiber Cable Connectors: 2 m
S3200-COCF2511
5m
ß
10 m
S3200-COCF2511
15 m
20 m
Over 20 m
Note
Model
S3200-CN201-20-25
S3200-CN501-20-25
S3200-CN102-20-25
S3200-CN152-20-25
S3200-CN202-20-25
S3200-CN-20-25
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
S3200-CN201-25-25
S3200-CN501-25-25
S3200-CN102-25-25
S3200-CN152-25-25
S3200-CN202-25-25
S3200-CN-25-25
(Specify length (m) when ordering.)
(1) The cables listed above are black and have power supply lines and tension members, although the power supply lines aren’t used in the SYSMAC LINK Network.
(2) All of the cables listed above are attached to the connectors with adhesive.
(3) Special training is required to assemble Optical Fiber Cables and connectors with adhesive.
Optical Fiber Cable
Accessories
Use the following accessories to assemble and test Optical Fiber Cables.
Name
Note
Model
Specifications
Optical Fiber
Assembly Tool
CAK-0057
(See note.)
Crimp-cut tool for the
S3200-COCF2071/2571 Connectors
Optical Power Tester
S3200-CAT2700
Master Fiber Set
S3200-CAT2001H
With S3200-CAT2702 Head Unit and
adapter for the S3200-COCF2071/
2571 and S3200-COCF2011/2511
Connectors
One meter cable for use with the
S3200-CAT2702 Head Unit
Use the CAK-0057 (made by Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.) to assemble
the S3200-COCF2071/2571 Connectors. (Production of the S3200-CAK1062
Assembly Tool has been stopped.) The S3200-COCF2071/2571 Connectors
can be assembled using the S3200-CAK1062 by adding the JRFK-57PLUS
(made by Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.).
This manual does not provide details on Optical Fiber Cable preparation. For
details, refer to the instructions provided with the CAK-0057 or S3200CAK1062 Assembly Tool.
Optical Fiber Cable Connections
All of the nodes in an Optical SYSMAC LINK Network are connected in a line
(daisy-chain configuration) with H-PCF Optical Fiber Cable.
The nodes can be connected in any order, but be sure to begin with the upper
connector (SL1) of the highest node in the network and connect to the lower
connector (SL2) in the next lower node, as shown in the following diagram.
27
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Also be sure to cover the unused connectors on the highest and lowest nodes
in the network with the provided Optical Connector Covers.
Optical Connector Cover
(Included)
Optical Connector Cover
(Included)
← Higher
Note
Lower →
(1) Always use the specified Optical Fiber Cables.
(2) The maximum distance between nodes depends on the method used to
attach the connector to the cable.
Installing Connectors
A special connector is used to connect the Optical Fiber Cable to the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
This manual does not provide details on Optical Fiber Cable preparation.
Observe the following precautions when connecting the Optical Fiber Cables.
• Always turn OFF the PLC power supply before connecting Optical Fiber
Cables.
• Special tools are required to attach Optical Fiber Cables to the connectors. The cable may disconnect from the connector if the proper tools and
methods are not used during cable assembly.
• Insert the connectors completely and always check that the connectors
are locked before starting operation.
• If a connector becomes disconnected, the node will be unable to communicate with other nodes in that part of the network. The network will be
divided into two and communications with the remaining nodes will be
unreliable. Be sure not to remove connectors during communications.
Transmission possible
but unstable.
Isolated
(Transmission not possible)
• Do not pull on the Optical Fiber Cable too forcefully.
The maximum tension that can be applied to the cord is 10 kg and the
maximum tension that can be applied to the cable is 50 kg.
Cord
Cable
• Do not bend the cable too sharply. The minimum radius for bends is
10 cm.
28
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
• To prevent the Optical Fiber Cable from being pulled too forcefully, always
use the cable securing bracket and provide space behind the Unit as
shown in the following diagram. Do not exceed the maximum tension for
the cord and cable:
Cord: 0 kg (Do not apply any tension.)
Cable: 5 kg
Cord
Cable
60
50
200
• Do not place objects on top of the Optical Fiber Cable. The maximum
pressure that can be placed on the cord and cable is as follows:
Cord: 30 kg/10 cm
Cable: 50 kg/10 cm
• Inspect the connector before installing it.
Connection Procedure
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to connect Optical Fiber Cables to a Unit.
1. Tighten screws in the mounting brackets so that the through-holes on the
terminal are on the top and bottom and then affix hexagonal nuts from the
opposite side of the terminal.
2. Insert bushing to the mounting bracket and secure the Unit with screws.
3. Pass the tension member through the through-holes, and tighten the terminal screws to affix the tension member.
4. Affix the cable to the mounting bracket so that it is clamped by the bracket.
Two cables can be attached at the same time.
5. Move the cable connector so that the loose ends are on the left-hand side,
and insert the Unit’s optical connector as far as it will reach.
2-4-3
Backup Power Supply
Each node requires a backup power supply for the node bypass function. Several nodes can be connected to a single power supply or each node can be
connected to an independent power supply.
Be sure that the backup power supply is providing sufficient current and voltage at the Unit’s connector.
Backup Power Supply
Specifications
The following table shows the input specifications required for backup power
supply to SYSMAC LINK Units. Be sure that the backup power supply being
used meets these specifications. (We recommend the OMRON S82K-series
Power Supplies.)
Item
Specification
Voltage
24 V DC
Allowed voltage fluctuation
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC –15% to +10%)
29
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Note
Item
Current consumption
Specification
200 mA max. at 24 V DC (per node)
Inrush current
2.5 A max. (24 V DC, 5-ms rise time)
(1) A label has been placed over the upper surface of the SYSMAC LINK Unit
to prevent wire cuttings from entering the Unit. When wiring the backup
power supply, leave the label in place.
(2) When wiring is complete, remove the label to avoid overheating.
(3) Use a power supply that is not connected to PLC operation, as in the case
of the node bypass function, for the backup power supply so that when
the power to the PLC is turned OFF, the backup power supply will continue.
(4) Use a dedicated power supply for the backup power supply. Do not share
a power supply being used for I/O, motors, or control systems.
(5) When two or more nodes are connected to a single backup power supply,
wire each node separately.
Wrong
OK
Backup power
supply
Note
Backup power
supply
Unlike the CV500-SLK11, the CS1W-SLK11 does not require an Auxiliary
Power Supply Unit for the node bypass function. Instead, directly connect a
24-VDC external power source as a backup power supply.
Attach crimp terminals to the power supply cable when connecting the backup
power supply to the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
24 VDC
Crimp Terminals
Use an M3 crimp terminal, as illustrated below.
6.2 mm max.
30
6.2 mm max.
Backup
power
supply
Section 2-4
Cable Connections
Recommended Crimp Terminals
Manufacturer
Model
Japan Crimp Termi- V1.25-N3A
nals KK
V1.25-MS3
MOLEX JAPAN
CO., LTD.
VSY1.25-3.5L
RAV1.25-M3
Note
Remarks
Suitable wiring
range
Vinyl insulated
forked terminal
Vinyl insulated
round terminal
Vinyl insulated
forked terminal
0.25 to 1.65 mm2
(AWG #22 to #16)
0.3 to 1.65 mm2
(AWG #22 to #15)
Vinyl insulated
round terminal
(1) Always turn OFF the power to the PLC and the backup power supply before connecting the backup power supply cables.
(2) Separate the backup power supply wires from other power lines and highvoltage lines to prevent noise.
(3) Always use a crimp terminal for wiring. Do not connect a wire that has
only been twisted directly to a terminal block.
(4) In the interests of safety, it is recommended that round crimp terminals
are used.
(5) When mounting the crimp terminal, always use the appropriate tools for
each crimp terminal and follow the appropriate installation procedures.
Contact the crimp terminal manufacturer for details on the appropriate
tools and procedures. Failure to use the appropriate tools and procedures
could cause cables to break.
(6) Measure the length of peeled cable during installation according to the
crimp terminal used and make sure that the peeled length is not too long.
Cover the compressed section of the crimp terminal and cable with vinyl
tape or heat-shrinking tube.
(7) Be sure not to reverse the power supply polarity.
(8) Tighten the screws on the terminal block firmly. The correct tightening
torque is 0.5 N • m. If the screws are too loose, short-circuit, malfunction
or burning may result.
(9) Do not pull backup power supply cables with excessive force.
(10) Do not bend backup power supply cables.
(11) Do not place any object on top of backup power supply cables.
(12) Supply power only after checking the wiring thoroughly.
31
SECTION 3
Basic Communications
A description of the token bus method of communications used in SYSMAC LINK Systems is described briefly in this
section, as well as the basic settings necessary for operation.
3-1
SYSMAC LINK System Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
3-2
Unit Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-3
Setting Node Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
3-4
Network Address Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-5
Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
3-6
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
3-6-1
Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
3-6-2
Word Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
33
Section 3-1
SYSMAC LINK System Communications
3-1
SYSMAC LINK System Communications
SYSMAC LINK Units communicate through the SYSMAC LINK Network, a
token bus LAN. This section describes the token bus communications used in
the SYSMAC LINK Network.
Token Bus
Communications
In token bus communications, individual nodes are connected to a main trunk
line as a common bus line, as shown in the figure below.
To avoid having two nodes attempt to transmit simultaneously, only one node
has the right to transmit at a time. The right to transmit is held by the node that
holds what is called the token, which is passed in sequence from node to
node, beginning with the node with the lowest node address (the polling node,
see below).
If the token is passed to a node that does not have data to transmit, the token
is immediately passed to the node with the next higher node address. The
node with the highest node address passes the token back to the node with
the lowest node address. In this way, each node in the network has its turn to
transmit data without interfering with other nodes.
Lowest node address
Node
Node
Node
Node
Control
sequence
Connecting cable
(trunk line)
Node
Node
Node
Highest node address
Polling Node
In a SYSMAC LINK Network there is one node, called the polling node, that
controls communications in the network. Normally, the Unit with the lowest
node address is the polling node. If the polling node fails, the node with the
next higher node address automatically becomes the polling node, preventing
the whole network from failing.
Startup Node
The node that starts the data link in a SYSMAC LINK Network is called the
startup node. The data link operates using the parameter settings in the DM
Area at the startup node. With automatic allocation of link words, the DM
parameter area settings are used, and with manual allocation, the common
link parameters in the startup node are used.
Communications Cycle
The token in a SYSMAC LINK Network is first passed from the polling node.
The token is passed in sequence from node to node by node address until it is
finally returned to the polling node. One complete circuit around the network is
known as a token cycle.
At the end of each token cycle, the polling node polls all of the nodes in the
network to check whether any nodes have been added to or removed from the
network. The updated information on the network is transmitted to all nodes.
This polling and updating process is known as the polling cycle.
When the control cycle is completed, the polling node once again passes the
token, beginning the next token cycle. Together the token cycle and control
34
Section 3-2
Unit Number
cycle make up the communications cycle, and the time required for the communications cycle is known as the communications cycle time.
Communications cycle
Token cycle
Polling cycle
Communications cycle
Token cycle
Polling cycle
Network Parameters
The communications cycle time is one of the network parameters. The other
network parameters are the number of polled units, maximum number of
frames, and the maximum node address. These parameters are transmitted
from the polling node to the other nodes in the network. Refer to 3-5 Network
Parameters for details on the network parameters.
Refresh Cycle Time
Data is constantly being refreshed in the data link words between the SYSMAC LINK Unit and the CPU Unit while the data links are operating. By
refreshing data, the CPU Unit sends local node data to the SYSMAC LINK
Unit, and receives data from other nodes from the SYSMAC LINK Unit. The
interval between data refreshing is called the refresh cycle time. The refresh
cycle time can be monitored using the Support Software.
3-2
Unit Number
Up to four SYSMAC LINK Units can be mounted on a CS-series PLC and
used to connect each Unit to a different SYSMAC LINK Network. Because the
PLC incorporates bridge and gateway functions, these and other networks
can exchange data via the CPU Unit. If more than one SYSMAC LINK Unit or
other CPU Bus Unit is mounted on a single PLC, however, each Unit needs a
unit number for identification.
Setting
Use the rotary switches on the front panel to set the unit number.
Unit No. 6
Setting Value Range
Unit No. 12 (hexadecimal C)
A total of 16 SYSMAC LINK Units and/or other CPU Bus Units can be
mounted on a single PLC. Of these, up to four can be SYSMAC LINK Units.
The unit number settings range is from 0 to F Hex.
Note
(1) Each Unit connected to the same PLC must have a unique number.
(2) Turn OFF the PLC when setting the rotary switches.
(3) If the unit number of any node has been changed, the I/O table on the
PLC must be generated again and that node must be turned ON after all
other nodes have been turned ON.
3-3
Setting Node Address
In token bus communications used in the SYSMAC LINK Network, the node
addresses make a logical ring around which the token is passed. The logical
ring of node addresses takes the place of the actual physical ring used in
some other networks. Consequently, proper setting of the node addresses is
essential to network operation.
35
Section 3-4
Network Address Setting
Settings
Node address switches determine the node address. The left switch sets the
ten’s digit; the right switch sets the one’s digit. The node address must be
between 01 and 62. Each SYSMAC LINK Unit in a Network must have a
unique node address.
Node number: 53
Note
Node number: 7
(1) Always turn OFF the PLC power before setting or changing node address.
(2) If the node address set on the Unit is outside of the allowed range (01 to
62), a communications error will occur and the red ERC indicator will light
on the Unit.
(3) Each Unit in the network must have a unique node address, so be sure
not to use the same address on more than one Unit.
(4) The token is passed from node to node according to node addresses, so
the more dispersed the node addresses are, the greater distance the token has to travel. In optical fiber systems, the communications cycle time
depends on the distance the token has to travel, so set node addresses
in the same order as the nodes’ positions in the network if possible.
(5) If you change a node address, start up the changed node last, and have
it participate in the network last.
3-4
Network Address Setting
It is necessary to set a network address on each PLC for data exchange
between networks. By setting the network address, the local node can
exchange data with a destination node even if there is another network
between them.
Setting
Use the Support Software to set the network address in the routing tables in
the CPU Unit (refer to 5-2 Routing Tables). Refer to the Support Software
operation manuals for setting details.
Setting Range
A system can include up to 127 networks. The setting range of the network
address is thus 1 to 127 (decimal). (Network address 0 is used to indicate the
local network.)
3-5
Network Parameters
The operation of the SYSMAC LINK Network is determined by the network
parameters. Network parameters are set with Peripheral Devices, such as the
Support Software, and are automatically backed up within the SYSMAC LINK
Unit. The network parameters stored in the polling node are used in actual
system operation; the network parameters in other Units are ignored.
Network Parameters
36
The following table shows the network parameters, their default values, and
the ranges within which the parameters can be set by the user. Default values
and setting ranges are in decimal.
Network parameter
Communications cycle time
Default value
Automatic
Setting range
5 to 255
Maximum node address
62
2 to 62
Section 3-5
Network Parameters
Network parameter
Number of polled units per communications cycle
Maximum number of frames per
communications cycle
4
Default value
Setting range
1 to 62
10
5 to 255
Communications Cycle Time
This parameter sets a timer that fixes the length of the communications cycle
to the specified time. The timer operates only when the data link is in operation. Set the communications cycle time when setting the data link table’s
common link parameters.
When the timer is in operation, the communications cycle time is fixed at the
specified value, independent of the number of events that occur. Refer to 4-11
Data Link Characteristics for the formula needed to calculate the communications cycle time when the data link is set for automatic generation.
Maximum Node Address
This parameter sets the maximum node address that a node can have and
still be a part of the network. Nodes with node addresses greater than the
maximum node address will not be polled, and therefore will not participate in
network communications. This eliminates unnecessary polling of units with
node addresses above the maximum, and thus reduces the time required for
communications.
Note
Set the maximum node address above the highest node address set on the
SYSMAC LINK Units currently connected unless you specifically want to
exclude one or more nodes from system operation.
Number of Polled Nodes
This parameter determines how many nodes will be polled by the polling node
during a polling cycle. Setting a high number of Units increases the communications cycle time, but reduces the time required to recognize that nodes have
been removed from or added to the network.
Maximum Number of Frames
This parameter determines how many event transmissions can take place
during a token cycle when data links are operating. With the default value of
10 frames, up to 4 event transmissions can be issued.
Event transmissions include instructions such as SEND(90), RECV(98), or
CMND(490), as well as processes such as remote monitoring and remote
programming from the Support Software.
Setting a high number of frames increases the communications cycle time,
while setting a low number will cause errors because of restrictions on event
transmissions when the data link is operating. Increase the number of frames
by three for each additional event transmission if data links are operating.
Setting Network
Parameters
Network parameters are set from the Support Software. Refer to the Support
Software manual for details. Network parameters are enabled immediately
after being set.
Note
(1) Do not set network parameters while data links are operating.
(2) Set the maximum node address to a value greater than the maximum
node address used in the SYSMAC LINK Units connected to the network.
37
Section 3-6
Memory Areas
3-6
Memory Areas
The CPU Bus Unit Area and part of the DM Area in the CPU Unit are used to
write or read the status of the nodes and the data links of SYSMAC LINK
Units. The data from the SYSMAC LINK Unit is written to the input words in
these areas.
3-6-1
Word Allocations
The memory areas that are used to write or read the data will be allocated
according to the unit number.
CPU Bus Unit Area
DM Area
38
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words from between CIO 1500 and
CIO 1899 as follows:
Unit No.
Words
0
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
Unit No.
Words
8
CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
1
2
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
9
10
CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
3
4
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
11
12
CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
5
6
CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
13
14
CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
7
CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
15
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
Each CPU Bus Unit is also allocated 100 words from between D30000 and
D31599 as follows:
Unit No.
0
Words
D30000 to D30099
Unit No.
8
Words
D30800 to D30899
1
2
D30100 to D30199
D30200 to D30299
9
10
D30900 to D30999
D31000 to D31099
3
4
D30300 to D30399
D30400 to D30499
11
12
D31100 to D31199
D31200 to D31299
5
6
D30500 to D30599
D30600 to D30699
13
14
D31300 to D31399
D31400 to D31499
7
D30700 to D30799
15
D31500 to D31599
Section 3-6
Memory Areas
3-6-2
Word Applications
The applications of the words in the CPU Bus Link Area and DM Area that are
allocated to SYSMAC LINK Units are described in the following tables.
CPU Bus Unit Area
I/O
Word
---
+0
Inputs
(from SYSMAC LINK
Unit to CPU
Unit)
+1
The words allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area to a SYSMAC LINK Unit are
used to access the status of the SYSMAC LINK System as shown in the following table.
Bit
0 to 15
Reserved by the system.
Item
Page
---
0
1
1: Network parameter error
1: Data link table error
129
129
2
3
1: Routing table error
1: Communications Unit (SYSMAC LINK Unit) setting error
129
---
4 to 6
7
Reserved by the system.
1: EEPROM error
-----
8
9
1: Node address setting error
1: Node address duplication error
128
128
10
1: Network parameter disagreement error
---
11
12 to 14
1: Network controller error
Reserved by the system.
---
15
128
+2 to +4
0 to 15
+5
0 to 13
0: No error log record
1: Error log record(s) exists
Network participation (1 bit per Unit for each of 62 Units)
0: Not participating
1: Participating
+6
14 to 15
0 to 7
Reserved by the system.
Local node address
--35
+7
8 to 15
0 to 7
Local network address
Node address of polling node
36
34
+8 to +22
8 to 15
0 to 15
+23
0 to 7
Local unit number
35
Data link status on each node using 4 bits per Unit for each of 62 Units: 56
CPU Unit operating, CPU Unit error, communications error, no error
(data links operating)
Node address of startup node (for data links)
8 to 13
+24
15
Local Data Link Active Flag
1: Local node data links active.
0: Local node data links not active.
0 to 10
11
Reserved by the system.
0: No power supply
1: Power being supplied (CS1W-SLK11 only)
Reserved by the system.
12 to 15
40
--17
---
39
Section 3-6
Memory Areas
Network Participation Status
If a node is participating in a network, the bit corresponding to the node
address will be ON. Node addresses (1 through 62) and their corresponding
bits are listed in the following table. (Bits 14 and 15 of word +5 are always 0.)
Word: 1500 + (25 x Unit Number) + 2 to 5
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Word +2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit 15
14 13 12 11 10
+3 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
+4 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
+5
Note
-
-
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Even if the local node is disconnected from the network, only the bit corresponding to the local node is turned OFF (i.e., the entire status area participating in the network is not turned OFF). While the local node is
disconnected, the bits corresponding to the other nodes will not be refreshed,
even if the participation status of other nodes changes.
Software Switches (D30000 + 100 × Unit Number)
Data link Star t Bit
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or already ON when power is turned ON
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Data Link Mode
00: Manual
01: Automatic for CIO Area only
10: Automatic for DM Area only
11: Automatic for CIO and DM Areas
Number of Send Words per Node
CIO Area
00: 4 words
01: 8 words
10: 16 words
11: 32 words
DM Area
8 words
16 words
32 words
64 words
CPU Bus Unit Settings Initialization (See note)
0: Do not initialize CPU Bus Unit Settings
1: Initialize CPU Bus Unit Settings
Polling Node/Polled Node Bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Note
40
Initializes the network parameters registered in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit and
clears the data link tables.
SECTION 4
Data Links
The operation of data links, procedures required to establish data links, and methods of monitoring data link operations
are described in this section.
4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Data Link Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
4-3
Data Link Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
4-4
Data Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
4-4-1
44
4-5
4-6
Rotary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
4-4-2
Specifying Data Link Mode and Number of Data Link Words . . . .
45
4-4-3
Data Link Start/Stop Bit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Creating Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
4-5-1
46
Automatic and Manual Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2
Automatic Data Link Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
4-5-3
Manually Generating Data Link Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
4-5-4
Table Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
Data Link Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-6-1
Automatic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-6-2
Manual Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
4-6-3
Refreshing Data Links with Automatic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
4-6-4
Refreshing Data Links with Manual Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
4-7
Data Link Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
4-8
Controlling Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
4-8-1
DM Parameter Area Software Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-8-2
DATA LINK START/HALT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-8-3
4-9
CX-Net in CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
Data Link Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
4-9-1
Data Link Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
4-9-2
Word Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
4-10 Data Link Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
4-11 Data Link Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
4-11-1 Data Link Communications Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
4-11-2 Data Exchange Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
4-11-3 Calculation Examples for Data Link I/O Response Times . . . . . . .
65
4-12 CX-Programmer Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
4-12-1 Overall Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
4-12-2 Data Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
41
Section 4-1
Introduction
4-1
Introduction
Data links can be created between PLCs or PLCs and computers in a SYSMAC LINK Network to exchange data. This data is transferred between interconnected PLCs automatically without requiring the use of normal I/O Units.
Words in the CIO and/or DM Areas are set aside as the data link words in
each PLC that is in the data link. Some of the data link words are allocated to
the local node and the rest are allocated to other nodes. Data can be written
only to the words allocated to the local node. During data link refreshing, data
written in the local node is transferred to corresponding words in other nodes’
memory areas. The result is that each PLC in the data link has a common
data link area, the only difference being in the read/write permissions for the
various words in it.
Data Link Tables
The data link words in each PLC are defined by a data link table, which
includes both common link parameters and refresh parameters. The common
link parameters define the words output by each node in the data link and are
thus the same for all nodes, and the refresh parameters define the words
input by each node and can thus be different for each node.
Data link tables can be generated automatically or manually. Automatic generation is accomplished simply by setting parameters in the DM Area. Manual
generation is accomplished by setting specific data links from the CX-Net in
CX-Programmer.
The following diagram shows the operation of a data link among four nodes in
a network. This data link was generated manually.
Data link words
1000
Node 2
Node 5
Link Area
Link Area
#2
1010
Node 6
Node 8
Link Area
Link Area
#5
1020
1010
#5
#5
#5
#6
1035
1039
#6
#2
1015
1020
1039
1030
1005
1000
#2
#6
1054
1049
Data link table
Refresh parameters
(can differ from
node to node)
Refresh parameters
(can differ from
node to node)
Refresh parameters
(can differ from
node to node)
Common link
parameters
(the same in all
nodes)
42
Refresh parameters
(can differ from
node to node)
Section 4-2
Data Link Specifications
Table Generation
Data link tables can be generated automatically or manually. Data link tables
generated automatically are identical in all PLCs in the data link, with the
words of the data areas listed below divided equally among 2, 4, 8, or 16
nodes. The number of words allocated to each node depend on the number of
nodes linked and is given in 4-2-1 Specifications Table later in this section.
CIO Area
DM Area
CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
D00000 to D00127
Manual generation provides much greater flexibility in making data links
among PLCs, but require that you manually input the data link tables. Manually generated data links can contain far more words and can use any part of
the CIO Area and/or DM Area, as shown in the following table.
Area
Data Link Area
CIO Area
DM Area
Note
Controlling Data Links
4-2
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
D00000 to D32767
Use Ver. 1.2 Service Pack 1 of the CX-Programmer. Settings for CS-series
SYSMAC LINK Units cannot be made with earlier versions of the CX-Programmer.
Data links can be activated and deactivated by turning ON and OFF bit 00 of
the first CPU Bus Link Area word allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit in PLC
memory, i.e., bit 00 of word D30000 + (100 x unit number).
Data Link Specifications
Basic specifications for data links are provided in the following table.
Item
Number of data link nodes
Number of linked words per node
Description
Manually generated data links
62 max., 2 min.
CIO Area: 254 words max.
DM Area: 254 words max.
2,966 words
(918 words for any Network with one or more
C200H PLCs)
Set in DM Area parameters.
(See following table)
Set from the CX-Net in CX-Programmer.
Status Area (in CPU Bus Link
Area)
CIO 1500 + (unit number x 25) + 8 to 23
(See following table)
Data link table backup
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area inside CPU Unit
(only for manually set data links)
Maximum number of linked words
in network
Automatically generated data links
Data Link Allocations for Automatic Settings
Area
Words allocated
CIO Area
DM Area
CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
D00000 to D00127
Number of words per node
2 nodes
4 nodes
8 nodes 16 nodes
32
64
16
32
8
16
4
8
43
Section 4-3
Data Link Indicators
Status Area Words
4-3
Unit No.
0
Words
CIO 1508 to CIO 1523
Unit No.
8
Words
CIO 1708 to CIO 1723
1
2
CIO 1533 to CIO 1548
CIO 1558 to CIO 1573
9
10
CIO 1733 to CIO 1748
CIO 1758 to CIO 1773
3
4
CIO 1583 to CIO 1598
CIO 1608 to CIO 1623
11
12
CIO 1783 to CIO 1798
CIO 1808 to CIO 1823
5
6
CIO 1633 to CIO 1648
CIO 1658 to CIO 1673
13
14
CIO 1833 to CIO 1848
CIO 1858 to CIO 1873
7
CIO 1683 to CIO 1698
15
CIO 1883 to CIO 1898
Data Link Indicators
The data link status can be checked using an indicator on the SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
CS1W-SLK11
Name
LNK
Note
4-4
Condition
CS1W-SLK21
Meaning
Lit
Flashing
Data links are operating normally.
Data links are not active due to data link table error.
Rapid flashing
Not lit
Data link table communications cycle time is too short.
Data links are not active.
Refer to Setup and Activation in 4-10 Data Link Precautions for details.
Data Link Settings
The following settings are required to run data links.
4-4-1
Rotary Switches
Set the node address using the rotary switches on the front of the Unit. Refer
to 3-3 Setting Node Address for details on setting the rotary switches.
44
Section 4-4
Data Link Settings
4-4-2
Specifying Data Link Mode and Number of Data Link Words
Set the data link mode to either automatic settings or manual settings, and set
the number of send words per node for automatic settings. These settings are
made in the DM Parameter Area allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Word: D30000 + (100 x Unit number)
Bit
"---": Other settings
Data Link Mode
00: Manual
01: Automatic with CIO Area only
10: Automatic with DM Area only
11: Automatic with CIO and DM Areas
Number of Words per Node (automatic settings only)
CIO Area
00: 4 words
01: 8 words
10: 16 words
11: 32 words
Note
DM Area
8 words
16 words
32 words
64 words
(1) Set data link tables in each SYSMAC LINK node on the network when
specifying manual data link tables.
(2) The data link mode (manual settings or automatic settings) and the data
link system are determined by the data link settings for the startup node.
(3) Be sure to set the data link mode (manual settings) and the data link table
in the DM parameter area of the startup node when using manual settings.
(4) Be sure to set the data link mode (automatic settings) and the number of
data link words in the DM parameter area of the startup node when using
automatic settings.
(5) The data links will not operate unless the settings are correct.
4-4-3
Data Link Start/Stop Bit
You can start and stop the data links by turning ON and OFF the bit in the first
word in the startup node in the DM Area allocated in the CPU Bus Unit. This
bit is in the DM Parameter Area allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Words: D30000 + (100 x unit number)
Bit
"---": Other settings
Data Link Start/Stop Bit
The data links will start when the bit is turned ON
or if it is already ON when the power is turned ON.
The data links will be stopped when the bit is
turned OFF.
!Caution Check the following before starting the data links. If the data link table settings
or the DM parameter settings are unsuitable, there is a risk of injury due to
unanticipated operation of the system.
45
Section 4-5
Creating Data Links
a. Manual settings: Check that suitable data link tables have been set in
each data link node. Check that data link tables have been deleted for
nodes not participating in the data links.
b.
Automatic settings: Check that suitable DM parameters have been set
in the data link startup node.
!Caution Even if the data link table settings or the DM parameter settings are suitable,
check that there will be no adverse effects on the controlled equipment before
starting or stopping the data links.
4-5
Creating Data Links
Data link tables store information required to run data link functions. The data
link area is created, and data is exchanged, based on the data link tables.
With manual settings, data link tables are backed up in the settings area in the
words allocated to SYSMAC LINK Unit as a CPU Bus Unit in the CPU Unit.
Note
4-5-1
Data link areas must be continuous in the CIO Area or the DM Area. You cannot make settings which leave unused words between the data link areas in
either the CIO Area or the DM Area.
Automatic and Manual Settings
• Automatic settings: Data link tables created automatically from the DM
parameter area settings.
• Manual settings: Data link tables set using Support Software.
Select either automatic or manual generation by specifying the data link mode
in the DM parameter area allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit in the DM
Area.
The differences between manually and automatically set data links are outlined in the following table.
46
Item
Data link mode setting in
DM parameter area
(D30000 = 100 x unit No.)
Automatic setting
Using CIO Area only
Bit 5: 0, bit 4: 1
Using DM Area only
Bit 5: 1, bit 4: 0
Using CIO Area and DM
Area
Bit 5: 1, bit 4: 1
Manual setting
Bit 5: 0
Bit 4: 0
Number of linked words
All nodes have the same
number of linked words.
Linkable words
The following words are
automatically used:
CIO 1000 to CIO 1063
D00000 to D00127
The number of words read
and the number of words
written can be set independently for each node.
Any of the words in the
CIO and DM Areas can be
linked.
Number of linkable nodes
The number of nodes
linked and the node
addresses are automatically set depending on the
number of words set per
node.
Data links can be set for
any portion or all of the
nodes (max.: 62).
Section 4-5
Creating Data Links
4-5-2
Automatic Data Link Tables
Settings
To automatically generate data link tables, the data link mode in the CPU Unit
DM Area parameters must be set for automatic generation and the numbers
of words per node in each of the CIO and DM Areas must be set. The data
link mode can be set to CIO Area only, DM Area only, or CIO and DM Areas.
You can select the number of send words to each node using the data link
word settings.
Allocated Words
The words allocated to each node for the various word settings are given in
the following table.
DM Parameter Area (D30000 + 100 x unit number)
Automatic data link mode settings
Bit 5: 0
Bit 5: 1
Bit4: 1
Bit 4: 0
Bit 5: 1
Bit 4: 1
CIO Area
words*
Note
DM Area words
(see note)
Bit 7: 0
Bit 6: 0
CIO:
4 Wds,
DM:
8 Wds
Words per node
Bit 7:0
Bit 7: 1
Bit 6: 1 Bit 6: 0
CIO:
CIO:
8 Wds, 16 Wds,
DM:
DM:
16 Wds 32 Wds
1000 to 1003
1004 to 1007
D00000 to D00007
D00008 to D00015
Node 1
Node 2
Node 1
1008 to 1011
1012 to 1015
D00016 to D00023
D00024 to D00031
Node 3
Node 4
Node 2
1016 to 1019
1020 to 1023
D00032 to D00039
D00040 to D00047
Node 5
Node 6
Node 3
1024 to 1027
1028 to 1031
D00048 to D00055
D00056 to D00063
Node 7
Node 8
Node 4
1032 to 1035
1036 to 1039
D00064 to D00071
D00072 to D00079
Node 9
Node 10
Node 5
1040 to 1043
1044 to 1047
D00080 to D00087
D00088 to D00095
Node 11
Node 12
Node 6
1048 to 1051
1052 to 1055
D00096 to D00103
D00104 to D00111
Node 13
Node 14
Node 7
1056 to 1059
1060 to 1063
D00112 to D00119
D00120 to D00127
Node 15
Node 16
Node 8
Node 1
Bit 7: 1
Bit 6: 1
CIO:
32 Wds,
DM:
64 Wds
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Node 2
Node 4
When using a data link that combines C-series SYSMAC LINK Units, CSseries SYSMAC LINK Units, and CVM1/CV-series SYSMAC LINK Units, LR
00 to LR 63 in C-series PLCs correspond to CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in CS/CVseries PLCs and DM 0000 to DM 0127 correspond to D00000 to D00127.
47
Section 4-5
Creating Data Links
4-5-3
Manually Generating Data Link Tables
You can manually set the data link words by setting D30000 + 100 x unit number, bit 5 and bit 4 to OFF. The data links are set in the DM parameter area
allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.
The manual settings, made with the CX-Net in CX-Programmer, are as follows:
Item
Common link Communications cycle time
parameters
Local node
send size
Refresh
parameters
CIO Area
Set the CIO Area local node send size in
words. Setting range: 0 to 254 words.
DM Area
Set the DM Area local node send size in
words. Setting range: 0 to 254 words.
PLC type
Data link start
address
Contents
Set the data link communications cycle time.
Select automatic or manual setting. Manual setting range: 5 to 255 ms
CIO Area
DM Area
Refresh node order
Note If 0 is set, the local node
will not send data (i.e., it
will receive only).
Select “CS” when using a CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit.
If using CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 Service Pack 1, set the CV/CVM1. (If the
CV/CVM1 is set, then only the ranges supported by the CVM1/CV-series
PLCs can be set.)
Set the start address in the CIO Area data link area for the local node.
Setting range: CIO 0000 to 6143
Set the start address in the DM Area data link area for the local node.
Setting range: D00000 to D32767
Set in order the node addresses with which the local node will refresh data,
starting with the data link start addresses set above.
If the address of the local node is set, it will send the specified word data to
other nodes. If the address of another node is set, the local node will receive
the data sent by that node. For example, if you enter 3, 2, 1 as the refresh
order, the node addresses will be allocated in the order 3, 2, 1, starting from
the start address. If the local node address is 1, it will receive data from
node 3, then from node 2, and finally, it will send data itself).
Always include the local node in the refresh node order. Data will not be
received from the local node by another other node if the local node is not
specified.
For settings using CX-Net, refer to 4-12 CX-Programmer Procedures.
When using a data link that combines C-series SYSMAC LINK Units, CSseries SYSMAC LINK Units, and CVM1/CV-series SYSMAC LINK Units, set
the CIO Area data link words bearing in mind that the C-series data links have
a maximum of 64 words from LR0 to LR63.
The data link area must be continuous in the CIO Area and in the DM Area.
4-5-4
Table Backup
Data link tables are automatically stored up in the CPU Bus Unit Settings Area
of the CPU Unit of the SYSMAC LINK Unit involved if backup is specified from
the Support Software. It is advisable, however, for common link and refresh
parameters to be backed up for safety. Back up using the Support Software.
For details, refer to the Support Software operation manuals.
Note
48
Data link tables are set in the CPU Bus Unit Settings Area of the CPU Unit. If
the CPU Unit is replaced or if the unit number or node address of a SYSMAC
LINK Unit is altered, it is necessary to set the data link tables again.
Section 4-6
Data Link Area Allocations
4-6
Data Link Area Allocations
Data link area allocations when the data link functions are started up are carried out as shown below, depending on whether the startup node data link
table has been set automatically or by the user.
4-6-1
Automatic Settings
All nodes are allocated the same data link area depending on the number of
link words set in the startup node. When automatic allocations are made, the
settings in nodes other than the startup node are invalid. Send word data for
each node is sent to the receive words allocated to the same memory area
words at the other nodes, and stored there. The shaded areas in the following
diagram indicate the send words for each node.
Node 1
(CIO Area)
4-6-2
Node 2
(CIO Area)
Node 3
(CIO Area)
Node 4
(CIO Area)
1000 to
1015
1000 to
1015
1000 to
1015
1000 to
1015
(Node 1 data)
1016 to
1031
1016 to
1031
1016 to
1031
1016 to
1031
(Node 2 data)
1032 to
1047
1032 to
1047
1032 to
1047
1032 to
1047
(Node 3 data)
1048 to
1063
1048 to
1063
1048 to
1063
1048 to
1063
(Node 4 data)
Manual Settings
The data link areas can be allocated as described in this section by using the
refresh parameter settings for each node.
Identical Allocations for
All Nodes
When editing data link table refresh parameters, set the same refresh parameters for all nodes. (Create refresh parameters for each node using the Support Software, even if the allocations are the same for all nodes. A copy
function is supported that will make identical settings easy.)
Node 1
Node 3
Node 5
Node 7
CIO Area
CIO Area
CIO Area
CIO Area
49
Section 4-6
Data Link Area Allocations
Different Allocations for
Each Node
To limit receiving from specified nodes and send only or receive only from
specified nodes, change the refresh parameters for each node. In the following example, node 5 does not receive data from node 6, and node 6 does not
receive data from node 2. Also, node 8 only receives data.
Node 2
CIO Area
DM Area
Note
Node 5
Node 6
Node 8
CIO Area
CIO Area
CIO Area
DM Area
DM Area
DM Area
The send area for node 8 has specified 0 for both the CIO Area and DM Area
in the common link parameters.
Only nodes with refresh parameters will participate in the data links.
Although the node order in the manual settings can be changed as you wish,
the Data Link Area must be created in continuous areas.
Creating Two or More Data
Link Groups in One
Network
The common link parameters are the same for each network. Consequently,
multiple data link groups cannot be created in a SYSMAC LINK Network. Virtual data link groups, however, can be created using the refresh parameters.
As shown below, if you divide the groups and set the send and receive words
for the nodes within each group, you can set multiple data link groups, as
shown in the following diagram.
50
Section 4-6
Data Link Area Allocations
It is still necessary to set the total data link words for group 1 and group 2 to
within the maximum number of link words (2,966 words).
Group 1
4-6-3
Group 2
Node 1
Node 2
CIO Area
CIO Area
Node 3
Node 4
CIO Area
CIO Area
Refreshing Data Links with Automatic Settings
Data link refreshing with automatic settings is carried out for all nodes in the
data link areas that have been specified.
In the following example, only nodes 2, 4, 5, and 6 are participating in the data
links. Nodes 1, 3, 7, and 8, however, will also be refreshed and words for them
cannot be used for other applications. If no data is received, nodes 1, 3, 7,
and 8 are refreshed with 0.
System Configuration
Node 2
Node 4
Node 5
Node 6
Refreshing for the above setup will be as shown below:
CIO Area
Note
Node 1
1000 to 1007
Node 2
1008 to 1015
Node 3
1016 to 1023
Node 4
1024 to 1031
Node 5
1032 to 1039
Node 6
1040 to 1047
Node 7
1048 to 1055
Node 8
1056 to 1063
Refreshed.
When using the SYSMAC LINK Units listed below, the node areas outside of
the node address allocated the lowest word addresses (node 2 in the above
example) and the node allocated the highest word addresses (node 6 in the
above example) are not refreshed (nodes 1, 7, and 8 in the above example),
and can be used for other applications in the CPU Unit of these SYSMAC
LINK Units.
• CVM1/CV-series SYSMAC LINK Unit (CV500-SLK11/21)
• C200HX/HG/HE SYSMAC LINK Unit (C200HW-SLK13/14/23/24)
51
Section 4-6
Data Link Area Allocations
• C1000H/C200HF/C2000H SYSMAC LINK Unit (C1000H-SLK11/21-V1)
4-6-4
Refreshing Data Links with Manual Settings
When manual settings have been made, data link areas will be refreshed for
all nodes specified in the refresh parameters.
In the following example, only nodes 3, 4, 6, and 7 are participating in the data
links. Nodes 1, 2, 5, and 8, however, will also be refreshed and words for them
cannot be used for other applications. If no data is received, nodes 1, 2, 5,
and 8 are refreshed with 0.
Node 3
CIO Area
0500
Node 4
Node 6
Node 7
Data Link words for node 3
Node 5
0510
0515
0520
Node 7
Node 3
Node 6
0530
Node 8
Range where the
data is refreshed
0535
Node 4
0545
0550
0555
Note
Node 1
Node 2
When using the SYSMAC LINK Units listed below, the node areas outside of
the node allocated the lowest word addresses (node 7 in the above example)
and the node allocated the highest word addresses (node 4 in the above
example) are not refreshed (nodes 1, 2, and 5 in the above example), and can
be used for other applications in the CPU Unit of these SYSMAC LINK Units.
• CVM1/CV-series SYSMAC LINK Unit (CV500-SLK11/21)
• C200HX/HG/HE SYSMAC LINK Unit (C200HW-SLK13/14/23/24)
• C1000H/C1000HF/C2000H SYSMAC LINK Unit (C1000H-SLK11/21-V1)
52
Section 4-7
Data Link Table Example
4-7
Data Link Table Example
In this example, the refresh parameters differ from node to node, so the data
link tables will also differ from node to node. There are four nodes in the network (2, 5, 6, and 8), but some nodes will not receive data from all other
nodes. The settings for the common link and refresh parameters are shown
after the data flow.
Node 2
Node 5
Node 6
Node 8
CIO Area
CIO Area
CIO Area
CIO
Area
CIO Area
1000
1000
2
1010
1025
5
1025
6
1029
D00000
1024
D00020
6
5
5
6
8
DM Area
5
D00010
D00040
D00014
DM Area
D00000
D00000
5
1025
1039
2
D00030
D00010
6
1015
2
6
DM Area
2
D00025
1020
1029
DM Area
D00020
5
1010
5
1010
1005
2
2
6
D00015
5
6
D00044
D00029
6
D00005
D00025
D00029
8
Words written by local node
Words read by local node
In this example, node 5 does not receive data from node 8, and node 6 does
not receive data from node 2. Also, node 8 only receives CIO Area data from
the other nodes
Create the data link tables for each participating node using CX-Net in CXProgrammer. The following settings are required.
• Local node send size
• PLC type
• Local node data link start address
• Refresh node order
53
Section 4-7
Data Link Table Example
Example of Node 2 Settings
Node 2 Table
Item
Node address
Common link
parameters
Setting
Number of words in
CIO Area
Number of words in
DM Area
Refresh param- PLC type
eters
Start word
CIO
DM
Refresh nodes
Note
Local node address: 2
CIO Area local node send size: 10 words
DM Area local node send size: 10 words
Select “CV/CVM1”
CIO Area local node data link start address:
CIO 1000
DM Area local node data link start address:
D00000
Node refresh order: 2, 5, 6, 8
Node addresses are listed in order with the
starting node address first. Because here
the local node is listed first, node 2 will first
send data and then received data in order
from nodes 5, 6, and 8.
When setting data link tables for CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units with CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 (Service Pack 1), set the PLC type to CV/CVM1. With CXProgrammer Ver. 2.0 or later, it is possible to set a CS-series PLC type.
Setting Tables for Other Nodes
Node 5 Table
Item
Node address
Common link
parameters
54
Number of words in
CIO Area
Number of words in
DM Area
Setting
Local node address: 5
CIO Area local node send size: 15 words
DM Area local node send size: 10 words
Section 4-8
Controlling Data Links
Item
Refresh param- PLC type
eters
Start word
Setting
Select “CV/CVM1”
CIO
DM
Refresh nodes
CIO Area local node data link start address:
CIO 1000
DM Area local node data link start address:
D00020
Node refresh order: 2, 5, 6
Node 6 Table
Item
Setting
Node address
Common link
parameters
Number of words in
CIO Area
Number of words in
DM Area
Refresh param- PLC type
eters
Start word CIO
DM
Refresh nodes
Local node address: 6
CIO Area local node send size: 5 words
DM Area local node send size: 5 words
Select “CV/CVM1”
CIO Area local node data link start address:
CIO 1005
DM Area local node data link start address:
D00000
Node refresh order: 5, 6
Node 8 Table
Item
Setting
Local node address: 8
Number of words in
CIO Area
CIO Area local node send size: 0 words
(nothing set)
Number of words in
DM Area
DM Area local node send size: 5 words
Node address
Common link
parameters
Refresh param- PLC type
eters
Start word
CIO
DM
Refresh nodes
4-8
Select “CV/CVM1”
CIO Area local node data link start address:
CIO 1010
DM Area local node data link start address:
D00000
Node refresh order: 6, 2, 5, 8
Controlling Data Links
It is necessary to start the data links after finishing the data link settings.
Starting the data links is carried out by any one of the following three startup
operations. This is true for both manual settings and automatic settings.
• From the DM parameter software switches
• By sending a command
• By using the Support Software
Note
(1) The data link mode (manual settings or automatic settings) and the data
link system are determined by the data link settings for the startup node.
(2) Be sure to set the data link mode (manual settings) and the data link table
in the DM parameter area of the startup node when using manual settings.
(3) Be sure to set the data link mode (automatic settings) and the number of
data link words in the DM parameter area of the startup node when using
automatic settings.
(4) The data links will not operate unless the settings are correct.
55
Section 4-9
Data Link Status
!Caution Check the following before starting the data links. If the data link table settings
or the DM parameter settings are unsuitable, there is a risk of injury due to
unanticipated operation of the system.
(a) Manual settings: Check that suitable data link tables have been
set in each data link node. Check that data link tables have been
deleted for nodes not participating in the data links.
(b) Automatic settings: Check that suitable DM parameters have
been set in the data link startup node.
!Caution Even if the data link table settings or the DM parameter settings are suitable,
check that there will be no adverse effects on the controlled equipment before
starting or stopping the data links.
4-8-1
DM Parameter Area Software Switches
To start the data links, turn ON the Data Link Start/Stop Bit in DM parameter
area in the CPU Unit of the node you wish to use as the startup node.
To stop the data links, turn OFF Data Link Start/Stop Bit in DM parameter
area in the CPU Unit of a node participating in the data links.
The Data Link Start/Stop Bit can be turned ON and OFF using the user program, Support Software, or a Programming Console (refer to 4-4-3 Data Link
Start/Stop Bit).
Word: D30000 + (100 x unit number)
−: Other settings
Bit
Data Link Start/Stop Bit
The data links will start when the bit is turned ON,
or if it is already ON when the power is turned ON.
The data links will be stopped when the bit
is turned OFF.
Refer to Section 4-12 CX-Programmer Procedures or CX-Programmer Operation Manual for actual procedures.
4-8-2
DATA LINK START/HALT Commands
Data links can be started by sending a DATA LINK START command from a
host computer or by executing the CMND(490) instruction to send the command from a PLC to the node you wish to use as the startup node.
Data links can be stopped by sending a DATA LINK HALT command from a
host computer or by executing the CMND(490) instruction to send the command from a PLC to a node participating in the data links.
Note
4-8-3
Refer to 6-4-1 DATA LINK START and 6-4-2 DATA LINK HALT for details.
CX-Net in CX-Programmer
The data link can be started or stopped from the Support Software. Refer to
CX-Programmer Operation Manual for details.
4-9
Data Link Status
The status of the local node and the nodes in the data links can be checked
from the data link status area in the words allocated to the SYSMAC LINK
Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.
56
Section 4-9
Data Link Status
4-9-1
Data Link Status
The following status is indicated through the ON/OFF status of each bit. Refer
to Word Configuration later in this section for specific allocations.
Item
Node status CPU Unit
Operating
Flag
Bits
0, 4, 8, 12
CPU Unit
Error Flag
1, 5, 9, 13
Data Link
2, 6, 10, 14
Communications Error
Flag
Local node
status
Contents
ON if the CPU Unit of the node is operating (RUN or MONITOR
mode).
OFF if the CPU Unit of the node is in PROGRAM mode.
• This flag is invalid if the Data Link Communications Error Flag for
the node is ON.
• If a fatal error (including an FALS instruction) occurs during operation, this flag will remain ON.
• When using this flag in programming, take an AND of NO conditions of it and the local node’s Data Link Active Flag.
ON if there is a fatal error in the CPU Unit of the node.
OFF when the CPU Unit of the node is operating normally.
• This flag is invalid if the Data Link Communications Error Flag for
the node is ON.
• When using this flag in programming, take an AND of NO conditions of it and the local node’s Data Link Active Flag.
ON if the node has a communications error and is not participating
in the network (if the designated node is not sending data link data,
communications from that node are assumed to be in error).
OFF when the CPU Unit for the node is operating normally (data
link data is being sent continuously from the node).
• To check participation of a node in the data links, take an AND of
a NO condition of this flag and a NC condition of the Data Link
Active Flag.
ON if the node has participated in the data links, even if only once.
OFF if the node has not yet participated in the data links.
• This bit turns ON once the node has participated in the data link,
and remains ON even if the node is no longer participating (used
to check system startup). Consequently, this flag cannot be used
to check the current participation status of a node in the data
links.
• When using this flag in programming, take an AND of NO conditions of it and the local node’s Data Link Active Flag.
Data Link
Active Flag
3, 7, 11, 15
Local Node
Data Link
Active Flag
Bit 15 of first ON if the node is participating in the data links.
allocated
OFF if the node is not participating in the data links.
data link +
• If this flag is OFF, local communications will not be operating nor23 words
mally, so there is no guarantee that the status of other flags will be
correct. Consequently, be sure to use this flag with an AND condition to check the status of other flags.
Network sta- Startup
tus
Node
Address
Note
Bits 8 to 13
of first allocated data
link word +
23
Startup node addresses 1 to 62 are stored as 1 to 3E Hex.
(1) The Data Link Active Flag is for checking the data link system. It is not
designed to check for data link errors. To check for data link errors, use
the Data Link Communications Error Flag.
(2) The CPU Unit Run Flag, CPU Unit Error Flag, Data Link Communications
Error Flag, and Data Link Active Flag are valid only if the Local Node Data
Link Active Flag is ON. Be sure to use the Local Node Data Link Active
Flag with an AND condition when using any of these flags in programming.
57
Section 4-9
Data Link Status
Program Example
Checking Data Link
Participation Status
To check participation of any one node in the data links, take an AND of a NO
condition of the Local Node Data Link Active Flag and the Communications
Error Flag for each node as shown below.
Node A
Data Link Active Flag
Node A: Participating in data links
Local Node Data
Link Active Flag
Node A Communications
Node B
Error Flag
Data Link Active Flag
Node B: Participating in data links
Node B Communications
Error Flag
Node n
Data Link Active Flag
Node n: Participating in data links
Node n Communications
Error Flag
Checking for Data Link
Errors in any Node
To check for an error in any node in the data links, take an OR of a NC condition of the Local Node Data Link Active Flag and the Communications Error
Flags for all nodes.
Local Node Data
Link Active Flag
Data link error in one
or more nodes
Node A Communications Error Flag
Node B Communications Error Flag
Node n Communications Error Flag
Outputting Local Node
Errors
The following example program section shows one way to output and error
signal when data links stop for the local node.
Local Node Data
Link Active Flag
Communications
Error Flag
Bit indicating data link
error in local node
58
Bit indicating data link
error in local node
Section 4-9
Data Link Status
4-9-2
Word Structure
The following table shows the data link status in memory. The numbers within
the table are in order of the nodes are set in the data link table (refresh parameters). These will correspond to the node addresses when using automatic
settings.
The data link status area corresponds to the first word of the words allocated
to the SYSMAC LINK Unit as a CPU Bus Unit +8 to +23.
Word: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) +8 to +23.
m+8
Word
Bits 00 to 03
Link No. 1
Bits 04 to 07
Link No. 2
Bits 08 to 11
Link No. 3
Bits 12 to 15
Link No. 4
m+9
m+10
Link No. 5
Link No. 9
Link No. 6
Link No. 10
Link No. 7
Link No. 11
Link No. 8
Link No. 12
m+11
m+12
Link No. 13
Link No. 17
Link No. 14
Link No. 18
Link No. 15
Link No. 19
Link No. 16
Link No. 20
m+13
m+14
Link No. 21
Link No. 25
Link No. 22
Link No. 26
Link No. 23
Link No. 27
Link No. 24
Link No. 28
m+15
Link No. 29
Link No. 30
Link No. 31
Link No. 32
m+16
m+17
Link No. 33
Link No. 37
Link No. 34
Link No. 38
Link No. 35
Link No. 39
Link No. 36
Link No. 40
m+18
m+19
Link No. 41
Link No. 45
Link No. 42
Link No. 46
Link No. 43
Link No. 47
Link No. 44
Link No. 48
m+20
m+21
Link No. 49
Link No. 53
Link No. 50
Link No. 54
Link No. 51
Link No. 55
Link No. 52
Link No. 56
m+22
m+23
Link No. 57
Link No. 61
Link No. 58
Link No. 62
Link No. 59
Link No. 60
Bits 08 to 13: Address of startup
node (01 to 3E Hex)
Bit 15: Local Data Link Active
Flag (ON: data link active;
OFF: data link inactive)
The status of the bits allocated to each node is as follows:
Bit 00, 04, 08, or 12: CPU Unit Operating Flag
Bit 01, 05, 09, or 13: CPU Unit Error Flag
Bit 02, 06, 10, or 14: Data Link Communications Error Flag
Bit 03, 07, 11, or 15: Data Link Active Flag
The actual words allocated to each node address for data link status are
shown in the following table.
Unit No.
Words
Unit No.
Words
0
1
CIO 1508 to CIO 1523
CIO 1533 to CIO 1548
8
9
CIO 1708 to CIO 1723
CIO 1733 to CIO 1748
2
3
CIO 1558 to CIO 1573
CIO 1583 to CIO 1598
10
11
CIO 1758 to CIO 1773
CIO 1783 to CIO 1798
4
5
CIO 1608 to CIO 1623
CIO 1633 to CIO 1648
12
13
CIO 1808 to CIO 1823
CIO 1833 to CIO 1848
6
7
CIO 1658 to CIO 1673
CIO 1683 to CIO 1698
14
15
CIO 1858 to CIO 1873
CIO 1883 to CIO 1898
If the Local Node Data Link Active Flag (bit 15 of first word +23) is OFF, the
data link status will be maintained as it was immediately before operation
stopped. This may not be the same as the actual current status. When using
59
Section 4-10
Data Link Precautions
the data link status, first check that the Local Node Data Link Active Flag is
ON.
4-10 Data Link Precautions
Be sure to consider the precautions listed below when activating a data link or
adding a node to an existing data link.
Setup and Activation
1,2,3...
Be sure to consider the precautions listed below when setting up and activating a data link.
1. Refresh parameters must be set for each node in the data link when manually generating data link tables. When a data link is started in a node that
does not have a data link table, a data link table error will occur and the
LNK indicator on that node will flash.
Refresh parameters must be set for all nodes that are included in the common link parameters in the startup node.
2. When data links are automatically generated, the node addresses of all the
nodes in the data link must be in the range resulting from the Communication Unit Settings.
For example, if the settings divide the data link area among nodes number
1 to 4 (16 CIO words and 32 DM words), node 5 cannot participate in the
data link.
3. With manual generation of data link tables, the node address of the local
node must be included in the local refresh parameters.
4. If the beginning CIO or DM word in the refresh parameters is set too large,
the CIO or DM Area will be exceeded during automatic allocation of link
words.
If the data area is exceeded in the startup node, the LNK indicator on the
startup node will flash and the data link will not operate. If the data area is
exceeded in another node, the LNK indicator on that node will flash and it
will not participate in the data link.
5. If the communications cycle time in data link tables is not generated automatically, and the setting for communications cycle time is too short, the
CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit (CS1W-SLK11/21) will not participate in the
data links. The LNK indicator on the Unit will flash quickly, and a data link
table communications cycle time settings error (021D Hex) will be registered in the error log. If this CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit is the startup
node for the data link, the data link will not be activated. The minimum possible communications cycle time setting can be obtained using the following calculation:
Minimum possible communications cycle time setting =
Maximum node address × 0.01
+ Number of polled Units × 0.25
+ Number of Link Units × 0.161
+ Total number of words in link area × 0.01
+ 5.322 (ms)
Round up the result of this calculation to obtain a value in milliseconds.
60
Section 4-10
Data Link Precautions
The data link table communications cycle time setting error registered in
the error log will contain the following information:
Error code
Detail code
021D Hex
1st byte
2nd byte
Communications cycle
time set in the data link status (Unit: ms, 2-digit hexadecimal)
Minimum possible communications cycle time setting (Unit: ms, 2-digit
hexadecimal)
The value in the 2nd byte of the detail code for 021D registered in the error
history will be the minimum possible communications cycle time setting.
For example, if the communications cycle time is set to 5 ms, and the LNK
indicator starts flashing quickly, an error code of “021D 0512” will indicate
that the minimum possible communications cycle time setting is 18 ms
(12 Hex).
021D 0512
Error code
Minimum possible communications cycle time setting
Communications cycle time set
Adding Nodes
Be sure to consider the precautions listed below when adding a node to active
data links.
1,2,3...
1. The node address of the node being added must be in the common link
parameters of the data links.
2. Set data link tables in the node being added. This is not necessary, however, when using automatic settings with the startup node, although it is
necessary to include the node being added in the table of nodes participating in the data link in the automatic settings.
3. The common link parameters for the node being added must be the same
as for the common link parameters already in operation. If the common link
parameters for the node being added are different from the common link
parameters already in operation, the node being added cannot participate
in the data link. Refer to the example below.
4. If the communications cycle time for the data link tables is manually set
when a CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit is to be added to the data links,
make sure that the value set is not below the minimum possible communications cycle time setting. For details of the values that can be set, refer to
the previous section, Setup and Activation.
61
Section 4-11
Data Link Characteristics
Adding a Node to a Data Link
Node 1
Node 2
CIO Area
1000
1010
1020
1010
1020
2
3
1030
1030
1039
1
1
3
Node 4
Startup node
Participating nodes
CIO Area
1000
2
Node 3
4
1010
1020
1
2
3
1039
1039
1000
1
1010
1020
2
3
1030
1030
4
CIO Area
CIO Area
1000
4
4
1049
The number of send words for node 4 is set as 20 words in the common link
parameters, but the number of send words is set as 10 words in the common
link parameters for other nodes that are already operating. Consequently,
node 4 will not participate in the data link network.
4-11 Data Link Characteristics
4-11-1 Data Link Communications Cycle Time
Data link servicing is given priority in SYSMAC LINK Systems. The communications time for a data link can thus be maintained as a constant, regardless
of whether or not SEND(90), RECV(98), and CMND(490) are used. Fixing the
data link communications time at a constant value fixes the data link I/O
response time as well.
The communications cycle time can be set either automatically (the default) or
controlled externally.
Automatic Generation
When data link tables have been generated automatically, the communications time will be as follows for systems using coaxial cable:
No. of nodes
Data link areas
2
CIO and DM Areas
CIO Area only
19 ms
17 ms
DM Area only
18 ms
4
8
19 ms
19 ms
17 ms
18 ms
18 ms
18 ms
16
19 ms
18 ms
19 ms
The communications time will be as follows for systems using optical fiber
cable:
No. of nodes
62
Data link areas
2
CIO and DM Areas
CIO Area only
21 ms
20 ms
DM Area only
21 ms
4
8
22 ms
22 ms
20 ms
21 ms
21 ms
21 ms
16
22 ms
21 ms
22 ms
Section 4-11
Data Link Characteristics
Manual Generation
When data link tables have been generated manually, the communications
cycle time can be set to a constant value or generated automatically.
The communications cycle time can be set as a constant from 5 to 255 ms in
increments of 1 ms using the Support Software to eliminate variations caused
by noise or other factors. When the communications cycle time is not set as a
constant, it will be generated automatically according to the equations below.
Round the result of the calculation to the nearest millisecond.
Communications cycle time (coaxial cable systems) =
Maximum node address × 0.085 ms + maximum number of frames
× 0.654 ms + number of polled units × 0.75 ms + number of Link Units
× 0.056 ms + total number of words × 0.01 ms + 1.322 ms
Communications cycle time (optical fiber cable systems) =
maximum node address × 0.1115 ms + maximum number of frames × 0.77
ms
+ number of polled units × 0.75 ms + number of Link Units × 0.056 ms
+ total number of words × 0.010 ms + 1.322 ms
Note
Example Calculations
The present and maximum values of the communications cycle time can be
monitored from the Support Software.
The examples below calculate the communications cycle time for both coaxial
and optical fiber cable with the following characteristics:
Maximum node address: . . . . . . 62
Maximum number of frames: . . . 10
Number of polled units: . . . . . . . 4
Number of Link Units . . . . . . . . . 32
Total number of words . . . . . . . . 2,000
Communications cycle time (coaxial cable systems) =
62 × 0.085 ms + 10 × 0.654 ms + 4 × 0.75 ms + 32 × 0.056 ms + 2000 ×
0.01 ms + 1.322 ms
= 37.924 ms (38 ms after rounding)
Communications cycle time (optical fiber cable systems) =
62 × 0.1115 ms + 10 × 0.77 ms + 4 × 0.75 ms + 32 × 0.056 ms + 2000 ×
0.01 ms + 1.322 ms
= 40.727 ms (41 ms after rounding)
Note
Data links might not operate correctly if the communications cycle time is set
to a value shorter than that generated automatically by the system. If the LNK
indicator on the front of a CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit (CS1W-SLK11/12)
flashes quickly (at approximately 100-ms intervals), either automatically set
the communications cycle time for the data link table, or manually set the
communications cycle time to a longer value.
Changing the Communications Cycle Time
When the communications cycle time is generated automatically, it can be
changed by changing the other network parameters on the Support Software.
The default values and setting ranges of the other network parameters are
shown in the table below.
Network parameter
Default value
Setting range
Maximum node address
Number of polled units
62
4
2 to 62
1 to 62
Maximum number of frames
10
5 to 255
Use the following formulas to calculate the change in the communications
cycle time that results from a change in other network parameters. A positive
63
Section 4-11
Data Link Characteristics
result indicates the communications cycle time has been decreased and a
negative result indicates it has been increased. Round the result of the calculation to the nearest millisecond.
Change of the communications cycle time (coaxial cable systems) =
(old maximum node address - new maximum) × 0.085 ms
+ (old maximum number of frames - new maximum) × 0.654 ms
+ (old number of polled units - new number) × 0.750 ms
Change of the communications cycle time (optical fiber cable systems) =
(old maximum node address - new maximum) × 0.1115 ms
+ (old maximum number of frames - new maximum) × 0.77 ms
+ (old number of polled units - new number) × 0.75 ms
Example Calculations
The examples below calculate the change of the communications cycle time
for both coaxial and optical fiber cable when the other network parameters are
changed as shown below:
Maximum node address: . . . . . .Changed from 62 to 16
Maximum number of frames: . . .Changed from 10 to 13
Number of polled units: . . . . . . .Changed from 4 to 5
Change of the communications cycle time (coaxial cable systems) =
(62 – 16) × 0.085 ms + (10 – 13) × 0.654 ms + (4 – 5) × 0.75 ms =
1.198 ms (1 ms after rounding)
Change of the communications cycle time (optical fiber cable systems) =
(62 – 16) × 0.1115 ms + (10 – 13) × 0.77 ms + (4 – 5) × 0.75 ms =
2.069 ms (2 ms after rounding)
Note
(1) If the maximum node address is set to a value less than the node address
of any nodes in the data link, those nodes will no longer be part of the
data links.
(2) If the maximum number of frames is set too low, errors might occur during
the execution of operations such as SEND(90), RECV(98), and
CMND(490) instructions, internode echo tests, and remote monitoring.
(3) Lowering the number of polled units will increase the delay between resetting a Unit or turning on its PLC’s power and its entrance into the network.
4-11-2 Data Exchange Timing
This section explains data link timing when using data links between SYSMAC LINK Units and a CPU Unit.
With a CS-series PLC, data exchange with the SYSMAC LINK Unit is performed by interrupt processing during the peripheral servicing time in the CPU
Unit cycle time. Data exchange timing is as follows:
PLC cycle time
Execution
PLC processing
Basic processing
I/O refreshing
CPU Bus
Unit service
Programming
Device/Host Link
service
Interrupt processing
for data exchange
Execution
Basic processing
If interrupt processing for data exchange is executed, the PLC cycle time will
be lengthened by the time required for the interrupt processing.
64
Section 4-11
Data Link Characteristics
Data Processing Time
The time required for interrupt processing for data exchange (data processing
time) can be roughly estimated as shown in the following table.
Data link scale
Data link is established for both areas 1 and 2
Equation for estimating data processing time
0.001 × Total number of data link words + 1.7 (ms)
Data link is established for only area 1 or area 2
0.001 × Total number of data link words + 1.4 (ms)
4-11-3 Calculation Examples for Data Link I/O Response Times
In a SYSMAC LINK Unit data link, there is a slight time lag between the time
input is received at one node in the link and the time output is made from
another node in response to this input. This time lag is called the data link I/O
response time. In this section, examples illustrating how to calculate the minimum and maximum I/O response times are given for the configuration shown
below.
Coaxial cable
PLC 7
PLC 1
SYSMAC LINK
Unit
Node 1
Input
Input
Output
LRXXX
LRXXX
SYSMAC
LINK Unit
Node 7
Output
Data link
Item
Condition
Maximum node address
Number of polled nodes
62
4
Maximum number of frames
Number of participating nodes
10
8
Number of nodes participating in data links
Number of send words for area 1
8
8 words per node
Number of send words for area 2
Messages
16 words per node
None
The time required for each of the above items is given below:
Communications Cycle Time
62 × 0.085 + 10 × 0.654 + 4 × 0.75 + 8 × 0.056 + 192 × 0.01 + 1.322 = 18.5
≈ 19 ms (For details, refer to page 62.)
Input ON Response Time
This is the time between an input signal being received and the relevant input
bit actually turning ON. Taken as 0 ms (min.) to 1.5 ms (max.) in this example.
Output ON Response Time
This is the time between the relevant output bit turning ON in the CPU Unit
and the output signal actually being sent. Taken to be 0 ms (min.) to 1.5 ms
(max.) in this example.
65
Section 4-11
Data Link Characteristics
Scan Time for PLC 1
Taken to be 25 ms in this example.
Scan Time for PLC 7
Taken to be 10 ms in this example.
Maximum Data Link I/O Response Time
I/O processing
Input
Data exchange
(1)
Scan time for PLC 1
Instruction
execution
(2)
Communications cycle
(3)
Scan time for PLC 7
Instruction
execution
Output
Instruction execution
Input ON response time
Scan time for PLC 1 × 2
1.5 ms
25 ms × 2
Communications cycle time × 2
Scan time for PLC 7 × 2 (see note a) below)
19 ms × 2
10 ms × 2
Output ON response time
Total (data link I/O response time)
15 ms
124.5 ms
The following delays occur at 1, 2, and 3 in the above diagram:
1,2,3...
1. The input bit turns ON just after a scan and so the time required for one
more scan elapses before the input is processed. Therefore a multiplication factor of 2 is applied to the scan time, as shown in the above table.
2. Processing for the input data is exchanged immediately after the right to
transmit is transferred from PLC 1, and so the time required for communications is extended by approximately one communications cycle. Therefore a multiplication factor of 2 is applied to the communications cycle time,
as shown in the above table.
3. Data is exchanged data with PLC 7 just after one scan and so the time required for one more scan elapses before output processing is performed.
Therefore a multiplication factor of 2 is applied to the scan time, as shown
in the above table.
Note (a) A multiplication factor of 3 (not 2) is applied to the scan time for
PLC 7 if it is longer than the communications cycle time.
(b) The I/O response time will also be affected by noise and other factors.
66
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Minimum Data Link I/O Response Time
Input
Scan time for PLC 1
Communications cycle
Scan time for PLC 7
Output
Maximum transmission delay time
Input ON response time
Scan time for PLC 1
--25 ms
Communications cycle time
Scan time for PLC 7
--10 ms
Output ON response time
Total (data link I/O response time)
--35 ms
4-12 CX-Programmer Procedures
This section describes the procedures from creation of data link tables to
starting up data links using CX-Net in CX-Programmer.
Here, the procedure for CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 (Service Pack 1)
is given as an example. The operations, windows, and setting items may vary
with the version of CX-Programmer.
4-12-1 Overall Procedure
If building SYSMAC LINK data links for the first time, make the settings using
the following procedure. It is necessary to create data link tables if using manually set data links.
Note
There is no need to create data link tables when using automatic settings. If
using automatically set data links, set the DM parameter areas (DM area
words allocated to the SYSMAC LINK Unit as a CPU Bus Unit) using a Programming Console or the PLC Memory Window in CX-Programmer.
1,2,3...
1. Start CX-Net from the CX-Programmer by selecting Tools and then Network Configuration Tool.
2. Open the CX-Server file (*.CDM) in CX-Net or create a new file in CX-Net
by selecting Project and then Open in CX-Net.
3. Start the Data Link Editor to create the data link tables by selecting Data
Link and then Editor.
• If creating the same data link tables in all nodes, start the Data Link
Engineer from the Data Link Editor by selecting Table and then Data
Link Engineer.
• If creating different data link tables for each node, create data link parameters for each node by editing tables for each node individually.
67
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
4. Check the data link tables from the Data Link Editor by selecting Table and
then Check.
5. Save the data link tables from the Data Link Editor by selecting File and
then Save or Save as.
6. Connect to the network from CX-Net by selecting PLC and then Open.
7. Read the data link tables and transfer them to the PLC using the Data Link
Setup Dialog Box from CX-Net. Select Data Links and then Setup.
8. Start the data links using the Data Link Status Dialog Box from CX-Net. Select Data Link and then Status.
Note
Data link tables cannot be set for the C200H-SLK21 and C1000H-SLK21.
Refer to 9-3 Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21 for details.
4-12-2 Data Link Settings
System Configuration
CX-Programmer
Node 2, CVM1 PLC
Node 1, CS-series PLC
Node 3, CS-series PLC
SYSMAC LINK Network
Note
The network settings for the three PLCs shown above have already been
saved in the CX-Server file (.CDM). For CX-Server file creation, refer to in the
CX-Programmer Operation Manual.
Opening CX-Server Files (.CDM)
Read the CX-Server file in CX-Net using the following procedure.
1,2,3...
68
1. Start CX-Net from the CX-Programmer by selecting Tools and then Network Configuration Tool.
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
2. Open the CX-Server file (*.CDM) in CX-Net or create a new file in CX-Net
by selecting Project and then Open in CX-Net. In this example, Sample.cdm is used as the file name. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Creating Data Link Tables
Create the data link tables for each node entered in the CX-Server file. In this
example, the data link tables are created automatically using the Data Link
Table Engineer, then the parameters are changed manually.
Starting the Data Link Editor
1,2,3...
1. Select Data Link and then Editor. A dialog box for selecting the type of
data link will appear.
2. Select SYSMAC LINK Data Link Table and then click the OK button. The
Data Link Editor [SYSMAC LINK] will start.
Making Manual Settings
without Using the Data
Link Table Engineer
You can make Manual Settings without using the Data Link Table Engineer.
Create data link tables manually in the following cases.
• The send area size is different for each node participating in the data link.
• The send node order is not the same as the order of node addresses.
• There are nodes that are not receiving data.
69
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Refer to the following example for details.
CIO Area
Node 1
Send (1)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(2)
Node 2
Node 3
Receive
(1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(2)
Send (2)
Send (3)
DM Area
Node 1
Node 3
Send (1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(2)
Receive
(2)
Send (2)
Send (3)
1,2,3...
70
Node 2
1. Select Data Link and then Editor. A dialog box for selecting the type of
data link will appear.
CX-Programmer Procedures
Section 4-12
2. Select SYSMAC LINK Data Link Table and then click the OK button. The
Data Link Editor [SYSMAC LINK] will start.
3. Set the data link communications cycle time in the Cycle Time field under
Common Link. If you select Auto, the optimum communications cycle time
will be automatically calculated according to the data link tables. If you select Manual, set the time manually between 5 to 255 ms (refer to 4-11 Data
Link Characteristics for communications cycle time details).
4. Double click a node address in the Nodes field, or select Table and then
Edit Table Item. The Data Link Table Entry Dialog Box will appear.
Note (a) If using CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 (Service Pack 1), select CV/
CVM1 for the PLC type when using a CS-series SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
If a CV/CVM1 PLC is set, the manual settings words will be limited to the same words as for CVM1/CV, as follows:
CIO Area: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555
DM Area: D00000 to D24575
(b) CS-series PLC types can be specified with CX-Programmer Ver.
2.0 or later and so the above limitations to manual settings words
do not apply.
71
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Set the local node CIO Area send size in
words. Setting range: 0 to 254 words.
When this setting is 0, the local node will
not send CIO data (i.e., will receive only).
The node address selected for editing
If using CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2
(Service Pack 1), select CV/CVM1
for the PLC type when using a CSseries SYSMAC LINK Unit. The
words for manual settings will be
limited to the same words as for
CVM1 and CV-series PLCs.
If using CX-Programmer Ver. 2.0 or
later, CS-series PLC types can be
specified and so the above
limitations to words for manual
settings do not apply.
Set the local node DM Area send
size in words. Settings range: 0 to
254 words. When this setting is 0,
the local node will not send DM
data (i.e., will receive only).
Set the address of the first
word in the CIO Area data link
of the local node. Setting
range: CIO 0000 to CIO 2555.
Set the address of the first word
in the DM Area data link of the
local node. Setting range:
D00000 to D24575. (Setting
range with CX-Programmer Ver.
2.0 or later: D00000 to D32767.)
Set in order the node addresses with which the local node will refresh data, starting
with the data link start addresses set above. If the address of the local node is set,
it will send the specified word data to other nodes. If the address of another node is
set, the local node will receive the data sent by that node. For example, if you enter
3, 2, 1 as the refresh order, the node addresses will be allocated in the order 3, 2,
1, starting from the start address. If the local node address is 1, it will receive data
from node 3, then from node 2, and finally, it will send data itself). Always include
the local node in the refresh node order. Data will not be received from the local
node by another other node if the local node is not specified.
5. Enter the value in each field.
The following example shows settings for node 1.
72
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Node address
Local node address: 1
Common link CIO Area size CIO Area local node send size: 20 words.
parameters
DM Area size DM Area local node send size: 30 words.
Refresh
PLC type
Select “CV/CVM1”
parameters
Start CIO
CIO Area local node data link start address:
word
CIO 1000.
DM
Refresh
nodes
DM Area local node data link start address: D00500
Node refresh order: 1, 3, 2
Node addresses are listed in order with the starting
node address first. Because here the local node is
listed first, node 1 will first send data and then
received data in order from nodes 3 and then 2.
6. Set the settings for node 2 and 3 in the same way. The following example
shows the settings for node 2.
The following example shows the settings for node 3.
73
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
7. The following display will appear when the data link table settings have
been made for all nodes. The example shows node 1 selected.
Settings and Display
Contents
Item
Common
Link: Common link
parameters
Contents
Cycle Time:
Communications cycle
time
Target
Node
Node Information
Total link CH:
Displays the total number of data link
Total number of words (CIO Area + DM Area). In the examlink words
ple, CIO 70 words + DM 90 words = 160
words.
Nodes
The number of send words is displayed for
each node. CIO: Number of CIO Area send
words. DM: Number of DM Area send
words. In the example, CIO: 20 send
words, DM: 30 send words.
Start Channel: Displays the words from which data links
Start words
start in the CIO and DM Areas for the
selected node. In the example, CIO 1000
and D00500 are displayed as the start
addresses.
Refresh
Parameters
74
Data link communications cycle time:
Select automatic or manual settings. Manual setting range: 5 to 255 ms.
Displays the order in which nodes are
refreshed in the second column from the
left. The values on the right are the number
of words received from the node in the CIO
Area and DM Area.
In this example, nodes are refreshed in the
order 1, 3, 2.
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
The following example shows the display for node 2.
The following example shows the display for node 3.
Using the Data Link Table
Engineer
Use the Data Link Table Engineer if creating data link tables similar to the
automatic settings. The Data Link Table Engineer will automatically create
data link tables with the following conditions:
• The PLC type will be the same for all nodes participating in the data links.
• The first word containing the data link status will be the same for all nodes
participating in the data links.
• The start word for data link area 1 and the start word for data link area 2
will be the same for all nodes participating in the data links.
75
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
• The send area sizes will be the same for all nodes participating in the data
links.
• The send node order will be in the order of node addresses
• There will be no nodes that do not receive.
Setting Example
The following example shows the Data Link Table Engineer settings.
Area 1
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Send (1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(2)
Send (2)
Receive
(2)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(3)
Send (3)
Area 2
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
Send (1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(1)
Receive
(2)
Send (2)
Receive
(2)
Receive
(3)
Receive
(3)
Send (3)
1,2,3...
1. Select Table and then Data Link Engineer. The Data Link Table Engineer
dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
2. Make the following settings.
• In the Valid Nodes Field, enter the node addresses for the automatic
settings.
• In the Common Link Parameters Field, set the send size for each node
in the CIO Area and in the DM Area. All nodes must have the same
send sizes.
• Set the PLC type in the PLC Type Field under Refresh Parameters. Select “CV/CVM1.”
• In the Start Channel Field, set the first words in the CIO Area and DM
Area data links.
76
CX-Programmer Procedures
Note
Section 4-12
If using CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 (Service Pack 1), select “CV/CVM1” for the
PLC type when using a CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit. With CX-Programmer
Ver. 2.0 or later, CS-series PLC types can be specified.
3. Click the OK button. As shown below, a data link table will be automatically
created for all nodes in the Nodes Valid Field. All nodes will have the same
start words and the same send sizes, and the refresh order set in the same
order as the node addresses.
This completes the data link tables creation. Next, check and save the data
link tables using the following procedures.
77
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Checking Data Link Tables
Select Data Link Editor [SYSMAC LINK], Table, and then Check. The check
results will be displayed as follows:
Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (W414) for details on error
messages for the check results of data link tables.
Saving Data Link Tables
Save the data link tables. Data link tables are saved with an .sl3 extension.
1,2,3...
1. Select Data Link Editor SYSMAC LINK, File, and then Save as. The
Save As Dialog Box will appear.
2. Enter the file name (e.g., “Sample”), specify the directory to which to save,
and click the Save button. The file will be saved with an .sl3 extension (e.g.,
“Sample.sl3”).
Connecting to the Network
1,2,3...
1. Select the PLC to connect to the network from the PLC Network Configuration Tool in CX-Net.
Shows the connection path. Red when
offline and green when online.
Select PLC to
connect.
PC001_Node 1 shows the SYSMAC Bus connection.
Shows the online PLC type and CPU model.
78
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
2. Select PLC and then Open. When connected, the display will change as
follows:
Turns green
Shows connection status and PLC mode.
Select PLC and then Open to reconnect if disconnected.
Reading and Transferring Data Link Tables
Read the data link tables that have been created and then transfer them to all
the nodes participating in the data links.
Reading Data Link Tables
1,2,3...
1. Start the CX-Net and select Data Link and then Setup. If connected locally
(i.e., directly to the PLC), the Data Link Setup (Local) Dialog Box will appear.
Select this button to display the
Communications Units mounted on
the PLC.
If connected remotely (i.e., through a network), the Data Link Setup (SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box will appear.
2. Select SYSMAC LINK and then click the OK button. The following dialog
box will appear.
Open the data link table file (*.sl3). Refer to Data
Link Setup (SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box Functions below for other button functions.
79
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
3. Click the Open button. The Open Dialog Box will appear.
4. Select the data link tables file (Sample.sl3), and then click the Open button. The data link tables will be read as follows:
The data link parameters (Common Link
Parameters and Refresh Parameters) will
be displayed when the data link tables are
read.
Click the Write button to transfer the
data link tables to the PLCs. Refer to
Data Link Setup (SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box Functions below for other button functions.
Transferring Data Link Tables
1,2,3...
1. Select the destination PLC node address in the Nodes Field under Common Link, or select the Operate on all Nodes in Network Checkbox. If
Operate on all Nodes in Network is selected, you can transfer data link
tables simultaneously to all PLCs.
2. Click the Write button.
• Data link tables will start to be transferred to the nodes set in the
Nodes Field, or to all the nodes on the same network.
• When the transfer is finished, the bottom of the window will be displayed as follows:
Note
If directly connected online with a PLC for which the routing tables have not
been set, data link tables cannot be transferred to PLCs that are not directly
connected to the network. Perform one of the following to transfer data link
tables to PLCs on the network.
• Directly connect to a PLC in which the routing tables have been set and
transfer the data link tables.
• Connect online to a PLC on the network, and transfer the data link tables.
Data Link Setup SYSMAC
LINK Dialog Box
Functions
80
The following table displays the functions of the Data Link Setup (SYSMAC
LINK) Dialog Box.
Button name
Function
Close
New
Closes the dialog box.
Clears the data link table currently in operation.
Open
Info
Reads the data link tables file (*.sl3).
Used to display and enter the name of the creator, file title, comments, etc.
Save as
Used to save the edited data link tables (*.sl3).
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
Button name
Edit
Function
Used to edit the data link table that has been read.
Update
Transfers the contents of the file edited in the Data Link Editor to the
Data Link Setup Dialog Box.
Reads the data link table for a specified node.
Read
Write
Verify
Delete
Transfers data link tables to the nodes.
Verifies data link tables between nodes and the Data Link Setup
(SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box.
Deletes data link tables from the nodes.
Starting and Stopping Data Links (with Status Display)
Connect online to a node to which the data link tables have been transferred
before performing the following operations. Data links can be started or
stopped from any node if the node has a data link table.
Starting Data Links
1,2,3...
1. Start CX-Net and select Data Link and then Status. If connected locally
(i.e., directly connected to a PLC), the Data Link Status (Local) Dialog Box
will be displayed. If connected remotely (i.e., through a network), the Data
Link Status Dialog Box will appear.
Select this button to display the
Communications Units mounted on
the PLC.
2. Select SYSMAC LINK and then click the OK button.
• The Data Link Status Dialog Box will be displayed.
• The status for each of the following will be displayed in the Data Link
Status Dialog Box. The communications cycle time and the refresh cycle time can be updated only when this window is open or when the
data link has been started or stopped.
Set the data link start and
stop using this selection
button and then the Set option button.
81
Section 4-12
CX-Programmer Procedures
3. Select the Run option button under Operation.
4. Click the Set button. The data links will start, and the Operational Status
Box will display the operational status.
Stopping Data Links
1,2,3...
1. Open the Data Link Status Dialog Box and then select the Stop option button under Operation.
2. Select the Set button. The data link will stop.
82
SECTION 5
Network Data Exchange
The CS-series PLCs allow data exchange between networks. This section provides the details of the data exchange
functions of the CS-series PLCs via SYSMAC LINK Networks.
5-1
5-2
5-3
What is Network Interconnection?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
5-1-1
Interconnecting SYSMAC LINK Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
5-1-2
Interconnecting Different Types of Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
5-2-1
86
Routing Table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
Local Network Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
5-2-3
Relay Network Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Routing Table Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
83
Section 5-1
What is Network Interconnection?
5-1
What is Network Interconnection?
Network interconnection enables commands and responses for the message
service to be sent and received across multiple networks. The four networks
listed below can be interconnected to achieve this.
FA Networks
• SYSMAC NET Networks
• SYSMAC LINK Networks
• Controller Link Networks
OA Network
• Ethernet Networks
5-1-1
Interconnecting SYSMAC LINK Networks
SYSMAC LINK Networks can be connected through a CS-series, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC.
SYSMAC LINK Network
CS-series,
CVM1, or
CV-series PLC
SYSMAC LINK Network
CS-series, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC (see note)
Note A data bridge is created between SYSMAC LINK Units mounted
on the same CS-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC.
5-1-2
Interconnecting Different Types of Networks
A CS-series, CVM1, or CV-series PLC can be used to connect a SYSMAC
LINK Network with an Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, or Controller Link Network.
SYSMAC LINK Network
CS-series,
CVM1, or
CV-series PLC
Ethernet Network
CS-series, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC (see note)
Note A data and communications protocol gateway is created between
a SYSMAC LINK Unit and an Ethernet, SYSMAC NET, or SYSMAC LINK Unit mounted to the same CS, CVM1, or CV -series PLC.
Note
84
(1) A bridge is used between Communications Units to connect the same
type of networks.
Section 5-1
What is Network Interconnection?
(2) A gateway is used between Communications Units to connect different
types of networks.
Bridge
SYSMAC LINK
Gateway
SYSMAC LINK
SYSMAC LINK
PLC
Ethernet
PLC
Data
Data
Data and communications
protocol gateway
• Although a C200HX/HG/HE PLC supports up to 2 Communications Units,
it cannot function as a data bridge or a data and communications protocol
gateway.
C200HX/HG/HE
CS or CV-series PLC
• A CQM1H-series PLC supports only one Communications Unit. It cannot
function as a data bridge or a data and communications protocol gateway.
• Communications across bridges or gateways can include up to three networks, including the local network (data generating network).
Network 1 (local network)
Network 2
Network 3
The maximum amount of data that can be sent between networks depends on
the type of networks through which data is being sent. The SYSMAC LINK
Network is limited a maximum of 552 bytes of data in any one transmission,
including the header. If a transmission passes through a SYSMAC LINK Network, as shown in the figure on the preceding page, the amount of data is limited to 552 bytes.
Although 2,012 bytes of data (including the header) can be sent and received
with a Controller Link Network, if a transmission between two Controller Link
Network passes through a SYSMAC LINK Network, the amount of data would
need to be limited to 552 bytes per transmission.
Refer to the manual for the network you are using to determine the maximum
amount of data that can be handled.
85
Section 5-2
Routing Tables
5-2
Routing Tables
Routing tables are required for data exchange with other networks or when
more than one SYSMAC LINK Unit, Controller Link Unit, or Ethernet Unit is
mounted on the PLC. For data exchange with other networks, set a routing
table on the local node, destination node, and relay node from a host computer or the Support Software. Refer to the Support Software manuals for
details.
!Caution The CPU Bus Units will be reset if the routing tables are transferred to the
CPU Unit from a Programming Device. The reset is required to update the
routing table settings. Confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before transferring the routing tables.
5-2-1
Routing Table Configuration
The routing tables consist of a local network table and relay network table and
determine the communications path for data exchange between networks.
Local network table
Routing tables
Relay network table
5-2-2
Local Network Table
If more than one Communications Unit (SYSMAC LINK, Controller Link, or
Ethernet Unit) is mounted on the PLC, a local network table is required. The
local network table has a list of each network and its corresponding Unit.
Two data items are set for each Unit:
Local Network Address:
Network address of the Unit (1 to 127)
CPU Bus Unit Number:
Unit number (0 to 15) of the Communications Unit
5-2-3
Relay Network Tables
To exchange data between two networks, you must set up relay network
tables that specify the transmission path to remote destinations.
Data transmission paths include the following settings.
Item
Range
Destination net- 1 to 127
work
Relay network
1 to 127
Relay node
CX-Net Settings Window
Example
86
1 to 62 for SYSMAC LINK
1 to 32 for Controller Link
1 to 126 for Ethernet
Contents
The network address of the designated node.
The address of the network through
which the destination network can be
reached.
The address of the node on the relay
network through which the destination network can be reached.
Create the routing tables using CX-Net in CX-Programmer as shown below.
Here, the procedure for CX-Net in CX-Programmer Ver. 1.2 (Service Pack 1)
is given as an example.
• Local Network Table
Local network address is 10 and the SYSMAC LINK Unit’s unit number is
5.
• Relay Network Table
Destination network address is 20, relay network address is 10, and relay
node address is four.
Section 5-3
Routing Table Examples
The local network table and relay network table are input as follows:
Setting Ranges
Item
Network address
Range
1 to 127
Unit number
Node address
5-3
0 to 15
SYSMAC LINK: 1 to 62
Controller Link: 1 to 32
Ethernet:
1 to 126
Routing Table Examples
Local Network Table
The following illustration shows an example of local network table settings for
a single PLC with more than one CPU Bus Unit.
Ethernet Network
Network address B
SYSMAC LINK System
Network address A
PLC acting
as bridge
Unit number a
Unit number b
Unit number c
CompoBus/S Network
PS:
Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
SLK ETN SRM CPU PS
ETN: Ethernet Unit
SLK: SYSMAC LINK Unit
SRM: CompoBus/S Master Unit
Local Netw ork Table
Unit
Network
No.
A
B
a
b
There is no network address for the CompoBus/S Master Unit, so no address
is set in the local network table.
87
Section 5-3
Routing Table Examples
Relay Network Tables
The following illustration shows an example of routing table settings with three
networks connected to one another. Take a look at the relay network table for
PLC 3. When network A is the destination network for PLC 3, B is the relay
network and c is the relay node. When network C is the destination network, B
is the relay network and e is the relay node.
Relay Network Tables
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
B
C
A
A
PLC 2
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
Node address b
Node address c
C
B
PLC 3
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
A
C
B
B
PLC 4
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
Node address e
Node address f
A
B
PLC 5
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
A
B
C
C
PLC 1
Node address a
Network
address A
Network
address B
Node address d
Network
address C
Node address g
Actual Example
Relay
node
b
b
Relay
node
e
Relay
node
c
e
Relay
node
c
Relay
node
f
f
The routing tables shown below are for the following system.
Unit 5
Node 6
PLC
(1)
CLK
Network 10
Unit 4
Node 5
Unit 3
Node 4
PLC
(2)
Unit 2 SLK CLK
Node 3
CLK SLK
PLC Unit 7
(3)
Node 15
Network 20
SLK
PLC
(4)
Network 30
PLC
(5)
SLK
Unit 0
Node 1
SLK
Unit 1
Node 2
PLC
(6)
SLK
Unit 5
Node 5
Unit 6
Node 10
Routing Tables on PLC 1
Local Network Table
88
Network
Unit
No.
10
5
Relay Network Table
End
Relay
Relay
netwk
netwk
node
20
30
10
10
4
5
PLC
(7)
Section 5-3
Routing Table Examples
Routing Tables on PLC 2
Local Network Table
Unit
Network
No.
10
20
3
2
Relay Network Table
End
Relay
Relay
netwk
netwk
node
30
10
5
Routing Tables on PLC 3
Local Network Table
Unit
Network
No.
10
30
4
7
Relay Network Table
End
Relay
Relay
netwk
netwk
node
20
10
4
Routing Tables on PLC 4
Local Network Table
Unit
Network
No.
20
0
Relay Network Table
End
Relay
Relay
netwk
netwk
node
10
30
20
20
3
3
Routing Tables on PLC 5
Local Network Table
Unit
Network
No.
20
1
Relay Network Table
End
Relay Relay
netwk
netwk node
10
30
20
20
3
3
Routing Tables on PLC 6
Local Network Table
Relay Network Table
Network
Unit
No.
End
netwk
Relay
netwk
Relay
node
30
5
10
20
30
30
15
15
Routing Tables on PLC 7
Local Network Table
Using Routing Tables
1,2,3...
Relay Network Table
Network
Unit
No.
End
netwk
30
6
10
20
Relay Relay
netwk node
30
30
15
15
The following descriptions shows how the above routing tables are used for
data transmission from PLC 1 to PLC 6 using a SEND(90), RECV(98), or
CMND(490) instruction.
1. PLC 1 checks its relay network table, and sends the data to node 5 (PLC
3) on network 10, to send the data to network 30, on PLC 6.
2. PLC 3 receives the data from PLC 6, checks its local network table, and
sends the data to node 5 (PLC 6) via CPU Bus Unit with unit number 7,
which is connected to network 30.
3. PLC 6 checks its local network table and confirms that the data transmitted
to node 5, network 30, is for PLC 6. Then PLC 6 retrieves the data.
89
SECTION 6
Message Service
This section describes the PLC ladder network instructions and FINS commands that can be used to transfer data and
control operation via a SYSMAC LINK System.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
About Data Read/Write Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
PLC Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
6-2-1
Specifying Destination Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
6-2-2
Communications Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
6-2-3
PLC Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
6-2-4
Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
6-2-5
NETWORK SEND Instruction - SEND(90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
6-2-6
NETWORK RECEIVE Instruction - RECV(98). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
6-2-7
DELIVER COMMAND Instruction - CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
6-2-8
Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
6-2-9
Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
FINS Command/Response Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
6-3-1
FINS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
6-3-2
Command/Response Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
6-3-3
Communications Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
6-3-4
FINS Commands for PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
6-3-5
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
6-3-6
Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
6-4-1
DATA LINK START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
6-4-2
DATA LINK HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
6-4-3
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
6-4-4
CONTROLLER DATA READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
6-4-5
CONTROLLER STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
6-4-6
NETWORK STATUS READ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
6-4-7
DATA LINK STATUS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
6-4-8
INTERNODE ECHO TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118
6-4-9
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
6-4-10 BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
6-4-11 ERROR LOG READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
6-4-12 ERROR LOG CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
91
Section 6-1
About Data Read/Write Services
6-1
About Data Read/Write Services
A SYSMAC LINK Unit provides read/write services that can be used to transfer data and control other nodes on the network or interconnected networks.
The data read/write services use a command/response format. Each time that
data or a command from a host computer or CS-series PLC is transmitted, the
receiving node returns a response. If responses are not needed, the Unit can
be set so that responses are not returned. The same transmission can also
be broadcast simultaneously to all nodes on the network.
Data Read/Write Service Transmissions
The data read/write services with the SYSMAC LINK Unit can be divided into
four processes, as described below.
Computer-originating
Commands
A program is prepared in the computer that transmits commands and receives
responses. (When programming in the C code, commands can be transmitted
with slksend and responses received with slkrecv or slkrcvw.)
PLC-originating Transfers
Data is transmitted from the PLC using the SEND(90), RECV(98), and
CMND(490) instructions. You may need to move data being transferred to/
from the locations in memory specified in the instruction, but the actual transmission and reception is handled automatically.
Computer Responses
A program that returns proper responses for received commands must be
prepared and loaded in the computer prior to command reception.
PLC Responses
The SYSMAC LINK Unit receives and processes commands and returns the
proper responses automatically. Since all of the processing is handled automatically, you do not need to prepare a routine for command reception in the
PLC program.
6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Data is sent from the PLC to other nodes (PLCs or computers) using the
SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(490) instruction in the PLC user program.
6-2-1
Specifying Destination Nodes
The following two types of communication are possible. Messages can be
sent to or received from a specific node, or it can be broadcast to all nodes.
Sending and Receiving
Data Between Specific
Nodes
The PLC’s network instructions (SEND(90), RECV(98), and CMND(490)) can
be used to transfer data to or from a node specified by network address and
node address. The unit address is also specified, enabling communications
with a specific Unit at the specified node.
Send data
Receive data
Node 1
92
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Broadcasting Data
It is possible to transfer the same data to all nodes in a network simultaneously by designating the destination node as FF Hex. This transmission is
called broadcasting. No responses are returned to broadcasts.
Broadcast data
Node 1
6-2-2
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
Communications Specifications
The basic specifications of the network instructions are given in the following
table.
Transmission
format
1:1 (SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(490))
1:N (SEND(90) or CMND(490); data broadcast, no response.
Max. number of words: 126 with Ethernet, 62 with SYSMAC
LINK, and 32 with Controller Link)
Packet length
SEND(90)/RECV(98): 256 words (512 bytes) max.
CMND(490): 542 bytes max.
SEND(90): Command/response data for data transmission
RECV(98): Command/response data for data reception
CMND(490):Command/response data for supported functions
Data content
6-2-3
Communications ports
Response timeout time
Ports 0 to 7
(8 ports can be used at the same time for data exchange)
0000: 2 s
0001 to FFFF:
User settings (in increments of 0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5 s)
Number of
retries
0 to 15
PLC Memory Areas
The memory areas that can be used for data transfer depend on the model of
PLC, as shown in the following table. Be sure not to exceed the end of a memory area when sending or receiving data. Also be sure to set the operands so
that the end of the data area is not exceeded.
Area
Note
CIO
Range
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
Work Area
Holding Area
W000 to W511
H000 to H511
Auxiliary Area
Timer
A000 to A959 (See note 1.)
T0000 to T4095
Counter
Data Memory
C0000 to C4095
D00000 to D32767
Expansion Data Memory
E00000 to E32767 (See note 2.)
(1) Writing is not possible to words A000 through A447 in the Auxiliary Area.
(2) A maximum of thirteen banks can be used for Expansion DM. For details
on the EM Area and the number of banks, refer to the operation manual
for the PLC model that is being used.
93
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
(3) When executing the SEND(90) or RECV(98) instruction on memory in the
LR Area, HR Area, or AR Area between a CS-series, CVM1, or CV-series
PLC and a C-series PLC (C200HX/HG/HE/HS/H, C1000H, or C2000H),
instead of the LR Area, HR Area, or AR Area addresses, use the corresponding addresses given in the following table.
Area in C-series PLC
LR00 to LR63
Corresponding area in CS-series,
CVM1, or CV-series PLC
1000 to 1063
HR00 to HR99
AR00 to AR27
1064 to 1163
1164 to 1191
(4) It is not possible to specify the CPU Bus Link Area in a CVM1 or CV-series PLC from a CS-series PLC.
(5) It is not possible to specify the Work Area or Holding Area in a CS-series
PLC from a CVM1, CV-series, or C-series PLC.
(6) When executing the SEND(90) or RECV(490) instruction on a CS-series
PLC from a CVM1 or CV-series PLC, the areas that can be specified are
restricted to the areas of memory built into the CVM1 or CV-series PLC.
The SEND(90) and RECV(490) instructions cannot be executed on memory outside these areas.
Specified area in CVM1 or CV-series
PLC
CIO
Settable range
0000 to 2555
AR
TIM
A000 to A511
T0000 to T1023
CNT
DM
C0000 to C1023
D00000 to D24575
EM
E00000 to E32765
(7) When executing the SEND(90) or RECV(98) instruction on a CS-series,
CVM1, or CV-series PLC from a C-series PLC, the areas that can be
specified are restricted to the areas of memory built into the C-series PLC
from which the instruction is executed. The SEND(90) and RECV(490) instructions cannot be executed on memory outside these areas. For details on C-series PLC memory areas, refer to the relevant operation
manual. When using a C200HW-SLK13/14/23/24 with a C200HX/HG/HE
mounted to it, however, the SEND(90) or RECV(490) instructions can be
executed for all areas except for the Work Area and Holding Area in CSseries PLCs and the CPU Bus Line Area in CVM1 or CV-series PLCs by
using indirect addressing. Refer to the C-series SYSMAC LINK System
Manual (W174) for details.
(8) Specification of indirect DM Area from a C-series PLC corresponds to the
EM Area’s current bank. Use indirect addressing to access a specified
bank number of the EM Area from a C-series PLC.
6-2-4
Communications Ports
When the SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(490) instructions have been executed, the status of the execution will be stored in the Auxiliary Area of the
PLC according to the communications port. Using this status information, the
PLC can adjust the timing of SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(490) execution
from the user’s program.
Timing Communications
Ports
94
Eight communications ports can be used simultaneously to execute the
SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(490) instructions, but only one instruction
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
can be executed at the same time for each port. To execute more than one
instructions in sequence at the same port, use the Port Enabled Flags to be
sure that a port is not busy before executing a new instruction for it. Port
Enabled Flags are contained in the status data provided in PLC memory for
network communications.
Name
Address
Word
Network Instruction
Enabled Flag
Network Instruction
Error Flag
A202
Port number corresponds to bit number, i.e.,
port 0: bit 00, port 1, bit 00, etc.
Port number corresponds to bit number plus
8, i.e., port 0: bit 00, port 1, bit 01, etc.
A219
Note
Communications
Instruction Response
Codes
Contents
Bit
0: Execution not enabled (executing)
1: Execution enabled (not executing)
0: Normal end
1: Abnormal end
With CS-series PLCs, ports 0 to 7 are also used for executing the PMCR
(PROTOCOL MACRO) instruction, therefore these flags are used for the 4
instructions: SEND(90), RECV(98), CMND(490), and PMCR(260). When the
PMCR(260) command is being executed, the same port cannot be used for
SEND(90), RECV(98), and CMND(490) instructions.
The status after a communications instruction has been executed is reflected
in the words shown in the following table. During instruction execution, it
becomes “00” or “0000,” and it is reflected here after the execution has been
completed.
PLC
CS Series
Flag Timing
Word
A203
---
Bits
Contents
Port 0 response code
A204
A205
-----
Port 1 response code
Port 2 response code
A206
A207
-----
Port 3 response code
Port 4 response code
A208
A209
-----
Port 5 response code
Port 6 response code
A210
---
Port 7 response code
The following timing chart shows the timing of the Port Enabled Flag, Port
Execute Error Flag, and response codes. In this example two commands
were executed for port 0 but there was an error for command 1.
Command 1
1
Port Enabled Flag
(port 0)
Execution
enabled
Executing
Response code (port 0)
Execution
enabled
Execution
enabled
0000
Response code
for command 2
Command 1
error occurred
0
Response code for the
previous command
0000
Response code
for command 1
Command Executed
accepted
Note
Executing
0
1
Port Execution Error
Flag (port 0)
Command 2
Command Executed
accepted
The new data will be sent if the data in the transmission area is changed while
a command is being executed. Do not change data in the area being transmitted unless the Port Enabled Flag is ON.
95
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
CMND(490) Instructions
1,2,3...
The following will affect the Port Execute Error Flag and response code when
you have executed the CMND(490) instruction.
1. A response time-out error.
2. The number of transmission data bytes exceeding the maximum permissible range (more than 021E (542) bytes for SYSMAC LINK Units).
3. The number of response data bytes exceeding the number of reception
data bytes that was set (in this case, no response will be recorded).
Errors other than the above will be shown in the response code in the
response block but will not be shown in the Port Execution Error Flag or
response codes.
96
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
6-2-5
NETWORK SEND Instruction - SEND(90)
The SEND(90) instruction allows a PLC to write data to the memory of a
device located at a node on a local or remote network.
Format
The format of the SEND(90) instruction is as follows:
Ladder Symbol
(90)
SEND
Operand Data Areas
S
D
C
Variations
S: 1st source word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
D: 1st destination word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
C: 1st control word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
@SEND(90)
*Indirect addressing only
Control Data
Set the destination node address to $FF to broadcast the data to all nodes in
the designated network or to $00 to send to a destination within the node of
the PLC executing the send.
Word
C
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
Note
1,2,3...
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
Number of words (1 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $0100)
Destination network address
Bits 08 to 15: Set to 0.
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)
Destination unit address
Destination node address
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
(0 to 15 Hex, i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07: Set to 0.
Bits 08 to 11: Port number ($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14: Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
Response monitoring time ($0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)
Transmissions cannot be sent to the PLC executing the send.
1. Number of Words
Set the total number of words to be transferred.
2. Destination Network Address
Set the destination network address to 00 if the destination network address is a local network. If more than one SYSMAC LINK Unit, Controller
Link Unit, or Ethernet Unit is mounted to the PLC, the network of the Unit
with the smallest unit address will be considered to be the local network.
3. Destination Node Address
Set the destination node address to FF for broadcasting within the local
network. Set to 00 (and set the network address to 00) for transmission to
a device at the local node.
4. Destination Unit Address
Set the destination unit to 00 if the destination is a PLC. If the destination
is a user’s application on a computer (NSB), set the destination unit address to 01 (user application 1).
Destination
Address (hexadecimal)
PLC (CPU)
NSB (computer)
00
01 (user application)
CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
10 to 1F: Unit No. 0 to F (0 to 15)
E1
Unit connected with the network
FE
97
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
5. Response Bit (Bit 15 of C+3)
Usually set this bit to OFF (0: response required). If you do not need any
response, set the bit to ON (1: not required).
6. Port Number
Set the communications port number that the SEND(90) instruction will be
sent from.
7. Number of Retries
Set the number of retries for unsuccessful transmissions. You can set the
number between 1 to 15. If 15 has been set, for example, the SEND(90)
instructions will be re-transmitted up to 15 times when the PLC does not
receive a response from the destination node.
8. Response Monitor Time (Unit: 0.1 S)
Designates the length of time that the PLC retries transmission when bit
15 of C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000,
which indicates 2 seconds. The response function is not used when the
destination node address is set to $FF, broadcasting to all nodes in the network.
Range of Control Data
The permissible ranges of control data to be set are as follows:
Item
Value
Number of words
Destination network address
Destination node address
0001 to 0100 (1 to 256 words)
00:
Local network
01 to 7F: Destination network address
00:
Transmission within local node
01 to 3E: Destination node address (1 to 62) (SYSMAC LINK)
01 to 20: Destination node address (1 to 32) (Controller Link)
01 to 7E: Destination node address (1 to 126) (Ethernet, SYSMAC NET)
FF:
Broadcasting
Destination unit address
00:
01:
10 to 1F:
E1:
FE:
PLC (CPU Unit)
Computer (NSB) user application
Unit number 0 to 15
Inner Board
Unit connected with the network
Response bit
0 (OFF):
1 (ON):
Required
Not required
Communications port number
Number of retries
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
0 to F (0 to 15)
Response monitor time
0000:
2 s (default)
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s with 0.1-s increments (set by the user)
Note
98
When broadcasting, there is no response from the nodes.
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
6-2-6
NETWORK RECEIVE Instruction - RECV(98)
The RECV(98) instruction enables the local node to write to its memory, data
sent from a node either on a local or remote network.
Format
The format of the RECV(98) instruction is as follows:
Ladder Symbol
(98)
RECV
Operand Data Areas
S
D
C
S: 1st source word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
D: 1st destination word CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
Variations
C: 1st control word
@RECV(98)
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
*Indirect addressing only
Control Data
Set the source node address to $00 to send data within the PLC executing the
instruction.
Word
C
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
Note
1,2,3...
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
Number of words (1 to 256 in 4-digit hexadecimal, i.e., $0001 to $0100)
Source network address
Bits 08 to 15: Set to 0.
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)
Source unit address
Source node address
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
Bits 08 to 11: Port number ($0 to $7)
(0 to 15 Hex, i.e., $0 to $F) Bit 12 to 14: Set to 0.
Bits 04 to 07: Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
Response monitoring time ($0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)
Transmissions cannot be received from the PLC executing RECV(98).
1. Number of Words
Set the total number of words to be transferred.
2. Source Network Address
Set the Source network address to 00 if you send the data to within the local network. If more than one SYSMAC LINK Unit, Controller Link Unit, or
Ethernet Unit is mounted on the PLC, the network of the Unit with the
smallest unit address will be considered to the local network.
3. Source Node Address
Set the source node address to 00 for devices at the local node.
4. Source Unit Address
Set the source unit address to 00 if the destination is a PLC. If it is a user
application on a computer, set the destination unit to 01 (user application
01). For a BASIC Unit, add 10 to the unit number (0 to F) so that the destination unit address is from 10 to 1F.
Destination
PLC (CPU)
00
Address (hexadecimal)
NSB (computer)
CPU Bus Unit
01 (user application)
10 to 1F: Unit Number 0 to F (0 to15)
Inner Board
Unit connected with the network
E1
FE
5. Response Bit (Bit 15 of C+3)
Always set this bit to OFF (0: response required).
99
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
6. Port Number
Set the communications port number that the RECV(98) instruction will be
sent to.
7. Number of Retries
Set the number of retries for unsuccessful transmissions. You can set the
number between 1 to 15. If 15 has been set, for example, the RECV(98)
instructions will be re-transmitted up to 15 times when the PLC does not
receive a response from the destination node.
8. Response Monitor Time
Designates the length of time that the PLC retries transmission when bit
15 of C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000,
which indicates 2 seconds.
Range of Control Data
The permissible ranges of control data to be set are as follows:
Item
Value
Number of words
0001 to 0100 (1 to 256 words)
Source network address
0:
Local network
01 to 7F: Source network address
Source node address
Response bit
00:
Transmission within local PLC
01 to 3E: Source node address (1 to 62) (SYSMAC LINK)
01 to 20: Source node address (1 to 32) (Controller Link)
01 to 7E: Source node address (1 to 126) (Ethernet, SYSMAC NET)
00:
PLC (CPU Unit)
01:
Computer (NSB), user application
10 to 1F: Unit number 0 to 15
E1:
Inner Board
FE:
Unit connected with the network
0 (OFF): Required
Communications port number
Number of retries
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
0 to F (0 to 15)
Response monitor time
0000:
2 s (default)
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s in 0.1-s increments (set by the user)
Source unit address
100
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
6-2-7
DELIVER COMMAND Instruction - CMND(490)
The CMND(490) instruction is used to send specific commands to transfer
data or to control operation at the destination node. When a command is sent,
a response is returned. Specifically, the CMND(490) instruction transmits a
command beginning at word S to the designated Unit at the destination node
address in the designated network and receives the response beginning at
word D. Refer to 6-3-4 FINS Commands for PLCs and 6-4 FINS Commands
for SYSMAC LINK Units for the commands that can be sent and the
responses received.
Format
The format of the CMND(490) instruction is as follows:
Ladder Symbol
(490)
CMND
Operand Data Areas
S
D
C
Variations
S: 1st command word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
D: 1st response word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
C: 1st control word
CIO, W, H, A, T, C, DM, DR*, IR*
@CMND(490)
*Indirect addressing only
Control Data
The control words, beginning with C, specify the number of bytes of control
data to be sent, the number of bytes of response data to be received, the destination node, and other parameters.
Word
Note
1,2,3...
Bits 00 to 07
Bits 08 to 15
C
Number of bytes to send (2 to 542, i.e., $0002 to $021E)1
C+1
Number of bytes to receive (2 to 542, i.e., $0002 to $021E)1
C+2
Destination network address
(0 to 127, i.e., $00 to $7F)2
Bits 08 to 15: Set to 0.
C+3
C+4
Destination unit address4
Bits 00 to 03: No. of retries
(0 to 15 Hex, i.e., $0 to $F)
Bits 04 to 07: Set to 0.
Destination node address5
Bits 08 to 11: Port number ($0 to $7)
Bit 12 to 14: Set to 0.
Bit 15: ON: No response.
OFF: Response returned.
C+5
Response monitoring time ($0001 to $FFFF = 0.1 to 6553.5 seconds)6
Commands cannot be sent to the PLC executing CMND(490).
1. Number of Bytes to Send
Set the total number of bytes of command data (including command code)
stored at the first command and following words of the command block.
2. Number of Bytes to Receive
Set the total number of bytes of response data (including response code)
to be stored at the first response and following words of the response
block.
3. Destination Network Address
Set the destination network address to 00 if sending the command to a
node in the local network. If more than one SYSMAC LINK Unit, Controller
Link Unit, or Ethernet Unit is mounted on the PLC, the network of the Unit
with the smallest unit address will be considered to be the local network.
4. Destination Node Address
Set the destination node address to FF for broadcasting within the local
network. Set to 00 (and set the network address to 00) for transmission to
a device at the local node. The destination node address can have the following values:
5. Destination Unit Address
Set the network destination address as shown below. If the Destination
101
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Unit Address has been set to FE, commands will be sent to the SYSMAC
LINK Unit, Controller Link Unit, or Ethernet Unit with the relevant destination node address.
Destination
PLC (CPU)
00
Address (hexadecimal)
NSB (computer)
CPU Bus Unit
01 (user application)
10 to 1F: Unit Number 0 to F (0 to15)
Inner Board
Unit connected with the network
E1
FE
6. Response Bit
Usually set this bit to OFF (0: required). If no response is required, set the
bit to ON (1: Not required).
7. Communications Port Number
Set the communications port number that the CMND(490) instruction will
be sent to.
8. Number of Retries
Set the number of retries for unsuccessful transmissions. You can set the
number between 1 to 15. If 15 has been set, for example, the CMND(490)
instructions will be re-transmitted up to 15 times when the PLC does not
receive a response from the destination node.
9. Response Monitor Time (Unit: 0.1 S)
Designates the length of time that the PLC retries transmission when bit
15 of C+3 is OFF and no response is received. The default value is $0000,
which indicates 2 seconds.
Note
Range of Control Data
If more than the Number of Bytes to Receive is received, no response will be
stored. If fewer bytes are received, the response data will be stored and the
unused memory area of the PLC will remain unchanged.
The permissible ranges of control data are as follows:
Item
Value
Number of bytes to send
Number of bytes to receive
0002 to 021E (2 to 542 bytes)
0002 to 021E (2 to 542 bytes)
Destination network address
00:
Local network
01 to 7F: Destination network address
Destination node address
00:
01 to 3E:
01 to 20:
01 to 7E:
FF:
00:
01:
10 to 1F,
or FE:
E1:
FE:
Destination unit address
Response Bit
Communications port number
Number of retries
Response monitor time
CPU Bus Unit (see note 1).
Inner board
SYSMAC NET Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit
0 (OFF): Required
1 (ON):
Not required
0 to 7 (0 to 7)
0 to F (0 to 15)
0000:
2 s (default)
0001 to FFFF: 0.1 to 6,553.5 s with 0.1-s increments (set by the user)
Note
102
Transmission within local PLC
Destination node address (1 to 62) (SYSMAC LINK)
Destination node address (1 to 32) (Controller Link)
Destination node address (1 to 126) (Ethernet, SYSMAC NET)
Broadcasting
PLC (CPU Unit)
Computer (NSB), user application 1
(1) FE, or unit number + 10 (FE can be set when the destination is a SYSMAC NET Link, SYSMAC LINK Unit, Controller Link Unit, or Ethernet
Unit.
PLC Network Instructions
Section 6-2
(2) When broadcasting, there is no response from the nodes. even if the Response Bit has been turned OFF.
103
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
6-2-8
0000
00
A202
07
Program Example
1200
02H
(011)
KEEP
120000
1200
01
CIO 120000 is ON while the SEND(90) instruction is
being executed, and it goes OFF when the execution of
the instruction has been completed.
1200
00
(021)
@MOV #000A D00000
1200
00
The 10-word data starting from D00010 on the local PLC
is sent to D00020 and following words on the PLC with a
unit address of 0, node address of 4, and network
address of 2.
(021)
@MOV #0002
D00001
(021)
@MOV #0400
D00002
(021)
@MOV #0705
D00000 00
0A Number of words: 10
D00003
D00001 00
02 Destination network address: 2
D00004
D00002 04
00 Destination node address: 4
Destination unit address: 0
D00003 07
05 Communications port No.: 7
Number of retries: 5
D00004 00
64 Response monitor time: 10 s
(021)
@MOV #0064
1200
00
The SEND(90) program section will run when
CIO 000000 is ON, provided that the Enabled Flag for
port 7 is ON and the RECV(98) instruction has not been
executed.
Word
(070)
@XFER &0010
0000 D00010
(090)
@SEND D00010
D00020 D00000
A202
07
(013)
DIFU
A219
07
120001
Content
Meaning
Storing the Send Data
The 10-word data starting from 0000 is stored in
D00010 and following words.
1210
00
Transmission error display
0000
01
A219
07
1200
00
(011)
KEEP 120002
CIO 120002 is ON while the RECV(98) instruction is
being executed, and it goes OFF when the execution of
the instruction has been completed.
1200
03
1200
02
(98)
@RECV
#0010 D00005
(021)
@MOV
#0003 D00006
(021)
@MOV
#3000 D00007
D00005 00
10 Number of words: 16
(021)
@MOV
#070F D00008
D00006 00
03 Destination network address: 3
#0000 D00009
D00007 30
00 Destination node address: 48
Destination Unit address: 0
2000
D00005
D00008 07
0F Communications port No.: 7
Number of retries: 15
(013)
DIFU
D00009 00
00 Response monitor time: Default
120003
A219
07
1200
02
1200
03
104
A100
A202
07
1200
02
1210
01
A219
07
The 16-word data starting from A100 on the PLC with a
unit address of 0, node address of 48, network address
of 3 is stored at CIO 2000 and following words a the
local PLC.
(021)
@MOV
(021)
@MOV
1200
02
The RECV(98) program will run when CIO 000001 is
ON, provided that the Enabled Flag for port 7 is ON and
the SEND(90) instruction has not been executed.
(070)
@XFER &0016
2000
D00040
Word
Content
Meaning
Reception error display
Reception data processing
When the data is received without an error, the 16-word
data received at CIO 2000 and following words is
stored in D00040 and following words on the same PLC.
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Note
6-2-9
To execute more than one instruction in sequence at the same port, you must
use the Port Enabled Flags to be sure that only one instruction is being executed at the same time for any one port.
Delay Times
The two diagrams that follow indicate the sequence of processing that will
enable users to calculate the maximum delay time to be expected between
the time SEND(90) or RECV(98) is executed and the time the data is stored in
the remote or local node’s memory area, ready for use by other instructions in
the program.
SEND(90)
The following diagram indicates the data flow that will yield the maximum
delay time from the time SEND(90) is executed by the user program to the
time the SYSMAC LINK Unit stores the data in the destination Unit’s memory.
Note
Be sure to take into account the time required for data links and program execution, which are not included in the following example.
SEND(90)
executed
SYSMAC LINK Unit servicing (source node)
LINK Service processing (source node)
Transmission processing
Communications cycle
Transmission delay
Reception processing
SYSMAC LINK Unit servicing
(destination node)
Max. transmission delay
LINK Service
processing
(source node)
LINK Service processing
(destination node)
Data stored
Max. transmission delay = Link servicing interval (source node) + Link service
processing (source node) + Transmission processing + Communications
cycle time + Transmission delay + Reception processing + LINK Unit servicing
interval (destination node) + Link service processing (destination node)
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Links are serviced once per PLC execution cycle. Refer to the CS-series PLC
Operation Manual for details.
Link Service Processing (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for SYSMAC LINK Units.
Transmission and Reception Processing
Number of words transferred x 0.0045 ms + 4 ms
Communications Cycle Time
Coaxial: Max. node address × 0.01 ms + No. of nodes × 0.075 ms + No. of
polled units × 0.75 ms + 1.322 ms
Optical: Max. node address × 0.01 ms + No. of nodes × 0.133 ms + No. of
polled units × 0.75 ms + 1.322 ms
105
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Transmission Delay
Number of words transferred × 0.008 ms + 0.204 ms
Note
Example
The I/O response time can increase due to noise or restrictions on the number
of frames that can be transmitted while the data link is operating.
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruction sending 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Max. node address:
32
Number of nodes:
32
Number of polled units: 4
Destination node CPU execution processing: Non-synchronous
Number of words:
256
Communications:
coaxial cable
Data link:
halted
RECV(98) Instruction
Maximum Delay Time
Delay cause
Link servicing interval (source node)
Maximum delay (ms)
PLC cycle time
Link service processing (source node)
Communications cycle time
Transmission processing
1 ms
32 × 0.01 + 32 × 0.075 + 4 × 0.75 +
1.322 = 7.042 ms
256 × 0.0045 + 4 = 5.152 ms
Transmission delay
Reception processing
256 × 0.008 + 0.204 = 2.252 ms
256 × 0.0045 + 4 = 5.152 ms
Link servicing interval (destination node)
Link service processing (destination node)
CPU Unit cycle time
1 ms
Max. transmission delay
CPU Unit cycle time (source
node) + CPU Unit cycle time
(destination node) + 21.598 ms
The data flow which will yield the maximum transfer interval from the time the
RECV(98) instruction is executed by the user program to the time the SYSMAC LINK Unit stores the data in the local Unit’s memory area is described
below.
Note
Be sure to take into account the time required for data links and program execution, which are not included in the following example.
RECV (98) executed
Data stored
Link service processing (source node)
Link service interval (source node)
Link service processing (source node)
Transmission processing (command)
Reception processing (response)
Transmission delay (response)
Communications cycle
Transmission delay (command)
Reception processing (command)
Transmission processing (response)
Link service interval (destination mode)
Link service processing (destination node)
Maximum transmission delay
106
Section 6-2
PLC Network Instructions
Max. transmission delay = Link servicing interval (source node) + Transmission processing (command) + Communications cycle + Transmission delay
(command) + Reception processing (command) + Link servicing interval (destination node) + LINK service processing (destination node) + Transmission
processing (response) + Communications cycle + (transmission delay
(response) + Reception processing (response) + Link servicing interval
(source node) + LINK service processing (source node).
Link Servicing Interval (Source and Destination Nodes)
Links are serviced once per PLC execution cycle. Refer to the CS-series PLC
Operation Manual for details.
Link Service Processing (Source and Destination Nodes)
Link service processing is the same as the PLC’s peripheral servicing and is
approximately 1 ms for SYSMAC LINK Units.
Transmission and Reception Processing
Commands: 2 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred x 0.0045 ms + 4 ms
Communications Cycle Time
Coaxial:
Max. node address × 0.01 ms + No. of nodes × 0.075 ms + No.
of polled units × 0.75 ms + 1.322 ms
Optical: Max. node address × 0.01 ms + No. of nodes × 0.133 ms + No. of
polled units × 0.75 ms + 1.322 ms
Transmission Delay
Commands: 0.204 ms
Responses: Number of words transferred x 0.008 ms + 0.204 ms
Note
Example
The I/O response time can increase due to noise or restrictions on the number
of frames that can be transmitted while the data link is operating.
In this example, the maximum transmission delay is calculated for an instruction receiving 256 words of data in a system with 32 nodes. Network specifics
are detailed below:
Max. node address:
Number of nodes:
Number of polled units:
Number of words:
Communications:
Data link:
32
32
4
256
coaxial cable
halted
Delay cause
Maximum delay (ms)
LINK Unit servicing (source node)
LINK service processing (source node)
PLC cycle time
1 ms
Transmission processing (command)
Communications cycle
Transmission delay (command)
2 ms
32 × 0.01 + 32 × 0.075 + 4 × 0.75 +
1.322 = 7.042 ms
0.204 ms
Reception processing (command)
Link servicing interval (destination node)
2 ms
CPU Unit cycle time
Link service processing (destination node)
Transmission processing (response)
1 ms
256 × 0.0045 + 4 = 5.152 ms
Transmission delay (response)
256 × 0.008 + 0.204 = 2.252 ms
107
Section 6-3
FINS Command/Response Format
6-3
Delay cause
Reception processing (response)
Maximum delay (ms)
256 × 0.0045 + 4 = 5.152 ms
Max. transmission delay
CPU Unit cycle time (source
node) × 2 + CPU Unit cycle time
(destination node) + 33.844 ms
FINS Command/Response Format
This section describes the format of the commands and responses used with
the CMND(490) instruction via a CV-series SYSMAC LINK Unit. SYSMAC
LINK Units support only FINS commands.
Unless another format is specifically indicated, all commands and responses
are in hexadecimal. Commands that are sent to a PLC CPU differ from those
that are sent to a SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Although SYSMAC CS-series PLCs support both C-mode and FINS commands, CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units do not support C-mode commands,
which are used for data exchanges with SYSMAC C-series PLCs.
6-3-1
FINS Commands
FINS commands form a command system for message services across different OMRON networks. They can be used for various control operations, such
as sending and receiving data, changing operating modes, executing forced
set and forced reset operations, performing file operations, and so on. FINS
commands make it possible to freely communicate with Units in various networks and on CPU Racks by simply specifying the network, node, and unit.
FINS commands have the following features:
1,2,3...
1. They are defined in the application level and do not depend on lower levels
(i.e., the physical and data link levels). This allows them to be used across
a variety of networks and CPU buses. Specifically, they can be used with
SYSMAC LINK, Controller Link, and Host Link networks, and between
CPU Units and CS-series CPU Bus Units.
Note FINS commands are sent with UDP/IP headers when using Ethernet
and with Host Link command headers when using Host Link.
2. FINS commands can be used to access various kinds of devices besides
CPU Units. Devices such as CPU Units, CS-series CPU Bus Units, personal computers (boards), and Inner Boards can be identified and specified by their unit addresses.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
Inner Board
CPU Unit
108
Personal computer board
Section 6-3
FINS Command/Response Format
3. FINS commands support network relay operations, so they can pass
through a network hierarchy to access devices on up to three network levels (including the local network).
Network 2
Network 1
Types of FINS Commands
Network 3
There are basically two kinds of FINS commands: Those addressed to CPU
Units and those addressed to CS-series CPU Bus Units. Among FINS commands for CPU Units, there are commands addressed to the various models
of CPU Unit, such as the CS-series CPU Units, CV-series CPU Units,
C200HX/HG/HE CPU Units, and so on. The basic code system is the same,
but the detailed specifications vary according to the CPU Unit.
Among FINS commands for CS-series CPU Bus Units, there are commands
addressed to SYSMAC LINK Units, to the Controller Link Unit, and so on.
6-3-2
Command/Response Parameters
All parameters used in commands and responses are in hexadecimal, unless
otherwise specified.
6-3-3
Communications Data Format
Command Format
Commands have the following format. This data must be stored beginning at
first command word specified as an operand (S) of the CMND(490) instruction.
2 bytes
540 bytes max.
Command
code
Response Format
Data
Responses have the following format and are stored beginning at the first
response word specified as an operand (D) of the CMND(490) instruction.
2 bytes
01
2 bytes
538 bytes max.
01
Command
code
Response
code
Data
109
Section 6-3
FINS Command/Response Format
6-3-4
FINS Commands for PLCs
Command
code
01
Name
RUN
PLC mode
MONITOR
DEBUG
PROGRAM
01
02
MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
03
04
MEMORY AREA FILL
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
05
01
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
PARAMETER AREA READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
02
03
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA CLEAR
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
04
05
PROGRAM AREA PROTECT
PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
06
07
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
04
08
01
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
05
02
01
STOP
CONTROLLER DATA READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
06
02
01
CONNECTION DATA READ
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
07
20
01
CYCLE TIME READ
CLOCK READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
09
02
20
CLOCK WRITE
MESSAGE READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
MESSAGE CLEAR
FAL/FALS READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
01
02
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
03
01
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
ERROR CLEAR
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
02
03
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG CLEAR
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
01
02
FILE NAME READ
SINGLE FILE READ
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
03
04
SINGLE FILE WRITE
MEMORY CARD FORMAT
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
05
06
FILE DELETE
VOLUME LABEL CREATE/DELETE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
07
08
FILE COPY
FILE NAME CHANGE
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
09
0A
FILE DATA CHECK
MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
0B
0C
PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER
PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER
Valid
(see note)
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
01
02
FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
02
03
0C
21
22
23
Note
110
When the PLC is in RUN mode, data transfers from files to the program area
are not possible, but transfers from the program area to files are possible.
Section 6-3
FINS Command/Response Format
6-3-5
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Command
code
04
01
05
06
08
21
Note
6-3-6
Name
Page
DATA LINK START (see note)
112
02
03
DATA LINK HALT (see note)
RESET
112
112
01
01
CONTROLLER DATA READ (see note)
CONTROLLER STATUS READ (see note)
113
113
02
03
NETWORK STATUS READ
DATA LINK STATUS READ
115
117
01
02
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
118
119
03
02
BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND
ERROR LOG READ (see note)
119
120
03
ERROR LOG CLEAR (see note)
121
These commands can also be sent to the PLC.
Response Codes
A response code consists of two bytes. If a command is completed normally, a
response code of 00 00 will be returned. The first two digits of a response
code are called the main response code (MRES) and the last two digits are
called the sub-response code (SRES). If command execution results in an
error, one of the response codes listed in the following table will be returned.
Refer to 8-1-2 Probable Causes and Remedies of Response Code Errors for
details.
MRES
Description
00
01
Normal completion
Local node error
02
03
Destination node error
Controller error
04
05
Not executable
Routing error
10
11
Command format error
Parameter error
20
21
Read not possible
Write not possible
22
23
Not executable in current PLC mode
No Unit
24
25
Start/Stop not possible
Unit error
26
30
Command error
Access right error
111
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
6-4
6-4-1
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
DATA LINK START
Activates data links in the SYSMAC LINK Network.
This command will be completed normally when link words are allocated
automatically or via data link tables only.
Command Block
04
01
Command
code
Response Block
04
01
Command Response
code
code
6-4-2
DATA LINK HALT
Stops data links in the SYSMAC LINK Network.
This command will be completed normally when the data link is in operation. If
the data link is not in operation, an error will occur.
Command Block
04
02
Command
code
Response Block
04
02
Command Response
code
code
6-4-3
RESET
Resets the SYSMAC LINK Unit.
No response is returned when this command is executed.
Command Block
04
03
Command
code
112
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
6-4-4
CONTROLLER DATA READ
Reads the following data:
• PLC model and version
• Cable type
• Node address
• Common RAM size
Command Block
05
01
Command
code
Response Block
05
01
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
20 bytes
PLC model
20 bytes
PLC version
Node address
Cable type/Common RAM size
PLC model and version (response):
Both are read in ASCII codes (20 bytes (i.e., 20 ASCII characters) max.
each). If the model or version requires less than 20 characters, the remaining
bytes will be filled with spaces (ASCII code 20).
Cable type and Common RAM Size:
Bit 7 will be ON if the SYSMAC LINK Network is using optical fiber cable; OFF
if it is using coaxial cable. Bit 00 to 02 will be 011, indicating that the common
RAM is 8 Kbytes. The common RAM is the buffer for the communications controller.
Node Address:
The node address of the SYSMAC LINK Unit from 01 to 3E (1 to 62).
6-4-5
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Reads the status of the PLC.
Command Block
06
01
Command
code
Response Block
06
01
Command
code
8 bytes
Response
code
Data link status
Participation
list
Status 1
Status 6
6 bytes total
Count 1
Count 8
8 bytes total
113
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Parameters
Status (response): The operating status of the data links as follows:
00: Stopped
01: Active
Status 1 (response): Communications test status as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1: Test running; 0: test stopped
Status 2 (response): Line status as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1: Power supplied; 0: power not supplied
Status 3 (response): Error status as follows:
Bit
7
0
6
0
5
4
3
0
0
0
2
1
0
1: Node address setting range error
1: Node address duplication error
1: Network parameter disagreement
Note
The registered network parameters are compared to the actually network
parameters upon power application the first time a Unit joins the network. If
the parameters do not agree, bit 2, above, will be turned ON, but the system
will not stop (the actual network parameters will automatically be registered).
Status 4 (response): The cause of communications controller errors as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
0
4
3
0
0
2
1
0
1: Watchdog timer error
1: Memory error
1: Chip error
1: Transmitter error
1: Local node echo test error
Status 5 (response): Backup status as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
1: Network parameter error
1: Data link table error
1: Routing table error
1: Software switch error
1: EEPROM error
114
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Status 6 (response): Error log status as follows:
Bit
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
0 0
5
0
0
0
0
1: Error log records present; 0: No error log records
1: Error log full (64 records)
Counts 1 through 8 (response):
Each of the following bytes provides two hexadecimal digits giving the total
number of occurrences of the following items since power was turned ON.
These counters will count to 255 and then remain there until power is turned
OFF again.
Count 1: Number of CRC errors
Count 2: Number of times token has been resent
Count 3: Number of times token has been passed
Count 4: Number of token time-outs
Count 5: Number of polling time-outs
Count 6: Number of times polling node has changed
Count 7: Number of times participating Units have changed
Count 8: Number of times communications controller transmit/receive
operation has stopped.
Participation List (response):
Bits in the last eight bytes of the response are turned ON to indicate when a
node is participating in the SYSMAC LINK network. The bit turned ON for
each node address is shown in the following illustration. Bits given as “–” are
always zero.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 1
8
7
6
5
4 3
2
1
Byte 2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Byte 3
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Byte 4
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
Byte 5
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
Byte 6
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
Byte 7
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Byte 8
6-4-6
−
− 62 61 60 59 58 57
NETWORK STATUS READ
Reads the status of the SYSMAC LINK Network.
Command Block
06
02
Command
code
115
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Response Block
06
02
31 bytes
Command Response
code
code
8 bytes
62 bytes
Cyclic error
Cyclic
counters
non-fatal errors
Network Communications
member data cycle time
Node address of
current polling node
Cyclic
transmission status
Cyclic operation
Parameters
Network member data (response): Four bits are allocated to each node
address to provide information on the status of nodes in the network as shown
below. The function of each of the 4 bits is shown in the diagram following the
table.
Byte
Bits 4 to 7
Bits 0 to 3
Byte 1
Byte 2
Node address 2
Node address 4
Node address 1
Node address 3
Byte 3
Node address 6
Node address 5
Byte 31
Node address 62
Node address 61
Bit 3/7 2/6 1/5 0/4
0
1: In network (0: Not in network)
1: Exited because of an error.* (0: Normal exit)
1: Unit does not respond to polling.
Note
*Bit 1/5 is used to indicate why the node is not in the network when bit 0/4 is
OFF.
Communications cycle time (response): The actual communications cycle
time is provided here in 4-digit hexadecimal in increments of 100 µs.
Node address of current polling node (response): The node address of
the Unit that currently is the polling node.
Cyclic operation (response): Indicates the current status of cyclic operation,
as follows:
00: Stopped
01: Active
Cyclic transmission status (response): Indicates the current status of
cyclic transmission, as follows:
00: No transmission
01: Transmission
116
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Cyclic non-fatal errors (response): These eight bytes indicate nodes in
which non-fatal errors occurred in cyclic transmission. When a bit in the following matrix is ON, a non-fatal error occurred in the corresponding node.
Bit 0 of the first byte and bit 7 of the eighth byte are always OFF.
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
First byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
−
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
Second byte
Third byte
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Fourth byte
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Fifth byte
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
Sixth byte
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
Seventh byte
55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Eighth byte
− 62 61 60 59 58 57 56
Cyclic error counters (response): One of these 62 bytes is allocated to
each node to indicate how many cyclic errors occurred since startup. The first
byte is allocated to node address 1, the second to node address 2, etc. Each
number is 2-digit hexadecimal, so 00 to FF (0 to 255 decimal) errors can be
recorded for each node. If more than 255 errors occur, the number will remain
at 255.
6-4-7
DATA LINK STATUS READ
Reads the status of the data link.
The various data link status information described here will not be refreshed
while the data link is halted.
Command Block
06
03
Command
code
Response Block
06
03
31 bytes
Command Response
Present
Max.
code
code
refresh time refresh time
Status flags
Parameters
Data link
status
Status flags (response): This byte contains flags providing information on
overall data link status, as follows:
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
3
0
2
1
0
0
1: Data link table error
1: No data link table
1: Automatic link word allocation
(0: Allocation via data link tables)
1: Data link is active.
(0: Data link is halted.)
117
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Present and Max. refresh time (response): The present and maximum data
link refresh times in 4-digit hexadecimal in increments of 1 ms. The range is
0005 to 00FF (5 to 255 ms, in decimal).
Data link status (response): Four bits are allocated to each node address to
provide information on the status of the data links, as shown below. The function of each of the 4 bits is shown in the diagram following the table.
Byte
Bits 4 to 7
Bits 0 to 3
Byte 1
Byte 2
Node address 2
Node address 4
Node address 1
Node address 3
Byte 3
Node address 6
Node address 5
Byte 31
Node address 62
Node address 61
Bit 3/7 2/6 1/5 0/4
1: PLC is in RUN or MONITOR mode
1: PLC is stopped because a fatal error has occurred.
1: Not in network or communication error has occurred.
1: Data link is active.
6-4-8
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
Performs an internode echo test with the indicated node.
Command Block
08
01
Command
code
512 bytes max.
Test data
Response Block
08
01
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
118
512 bytes max.
Test data
Test data (command and response): Up to 512 bytes of test data can be
included in the command. This data is transmitted to the indicated node and
returned unchanged if communications are normal. If the data returned in the
response differs from that transmitted in the command, an error occurred in
the internode echo test.
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
6-4-9
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
Reads the results (number of receptions for each node) of the broadcast tests
carried out using the BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND command. Refer to 64-10 BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND for details.
Command Block
08
02
Command
code
Response Block
08
02
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
Number of
receptions
Number of receptions (response): The number of times that the BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND command has been executed since the last
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ command was executed.
When this command is executed, the number of receptions data stored in the
destination nodes is cleared. If the number of receptions does not equal the
number of times that the BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND command has
been executed since the last BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ command
was executed, an error has occurred.
6-4-10 BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND
Sends the test data in the command to all nodes in the specified network. No
response will be returned when this command is executed, but reception of
the test data can be verified by executing the BROADCAST TEST RESULTS
READ command. Refer to 6-4-9 BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ for
details.
Command Block
08
03
Command
code
Note
512 bytes max.
Test data
Make the following control data settings when executing this command:
a. Destination node address:
FF (broadcast transmission)
b.
Destination node unit number: FE (to SYSMAC LINK Units)
c.
Response Bit (bit 13 of C+1):
ON (response not returned)
119
Section 6-4
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
6-4-11 ERROR LOG READ
Reads the error log.
Note
(1) When the error log does not have the specified number of records, all the
records that have been stored will be read and an address range overflow
error will result.
(2) If the data is too large and exceeds the permissible length of the response
block, the part in excess will not be read and a response length overflow
error will result.
Command Block
21
02
Command
code
Beginning
record No.
No. of
records
Response Block
21
02
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
Max. No.
of records
No. of
stored
records
No. of
records
10 bytes
10 bytes
Error log
data
Error log
data
Beginning record No. (command): The first record to be read (the first
record number is 0000).
Max. No. of records (response): The maximum number of records that can
be recorded. (The maximum number of records is different for the CPU Unit
and the CPU Bus Units. CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units have 27 Hex (39)
records.)
No. of stored records (response): The number of records that have been
recorded.
No. of records (command and response): The number of records read.
Specify between 0000 to 0027 (0 to 39 records). If the number of records is
not specified, all records to present will be read and a normal response code
will be returned. If the number of records causes the response to exceed 540
bytes, records through 540 bytes will be returned along with a normal
response code.
Error log data (response): The specified error log records will be returned in
sequence starting from the beginning record number. The total number of
bytes required is calculated as follows:
Number of records × 10 bytes
The configuration of each error record is as follows:
1st byte
Error code
10th byte
Detail
Minute
Day Hour Year Month
Second
Each data includes the second, minute, hour (0 to 23), date, month, and year
(the rightmost two digits) in BCD specifying the time that the error occurred.
120
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
Section 6-4
6-4-12 ERROR LOG CLEAR
Clears all error log records.
Command Block
21
03
Command
format
Response Block
21
03
Command
format
Response
code
121
FINS Commands for SYSMAC LINK Units
122
Section 6-4
SECTION 7
Remote Monitoring and Programming
Information on remote programming and monitoring is provided in this section.
7-1
Remote Programming and Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
7-1-1
Local Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
7-1-2
Remote SYSMAC LINK Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
7-1-3
Remote Programming and Monitoring Different Networks . . . . . .
125
123
Section 7-1
Remote Programming and Monitoring
7-1
Remote Programming and Monitoring
A remote PLC can be programmed and monitored across a network from a
Programming Device connected to a PLC.
7-1-1
Local Networks
A CX-Programmer connected to a CS-series, CVM1, CV-series, or C200HX/
HG/HE CPU Unit can program and monitor a CPU Unit on the same network.
Programming and monitoring are possible, including CPU Units that are different from the one to which the Programming Device is connected.
CX-Programmer
Programming Device
SYSMAC LINK Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLC
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLC
SYSMAC LINK Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS-series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring are possible from a computer using the
CX-Programmer as a node.
7-1-2
Remote SYSMAC LINK Networks
A CX-Programmer connected to a CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE, or CV-series
CPU Unit can program and monitor any other PLC on another SYSMAC LINK
Network. Other types of PLC, different from the one to which the CX-Programmer is connected can also be programmed or monitored on remote networks.
CX-Programmer
Programming Device
SYSMAC LINK Network
SYSMAC LINK Network
Programming
and monitoring
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE,
or CV-series PLC
CS-series, CVM1,
CV-series PLC CV-series, or
C200HX/HG/HE PLC
SYSMAC LINK Network SYSMAC LINK Network
CX-Programmer
CS-series, CS-series PLC
CVM1, or CVseries PLC
Note
124
Remote programming and monitoring are possible from a computer using the
CX-Programmer as a node. With the C200H-SLK21 and C1000H-SLK21,
however, remote programming and monitoring are not possible with the CXProgrammer. Refer to 9-3 Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21 for
details.
Section 7-1
Remote Programming and Monitoring
7-1-3
Remote Programming and Monitoring Different Networks
You can program and monitor CPU Units on different networks (Ethernet,
SYSMAC NET, and Controller Link) from a CX-Programmer connected to a
CS-series, CVM1/CV-series, or C200HX/HG/HE-series CPU Unit. CS-series,
CVM1, and CV-series PLCs must be used as the bridges between the networks.
CX-Programmer
Programming Device
Controller Link Network,
Ethernet Network, etc.
SYSMAC LINK Network
Programming/
Monitoring
CS-series, CVM1, CV-series, or
C200HX/HG/HE-series PLC
CX-Programmer
SYSMAC LINK
CS1
CS, CVM1, or
CV-series PLC
Controller Link,
Ethernet, etc.
C200HX/HG/HE CS-series PLC CVM1 or
CV-series PLC
Note Remote programming and monitoring is possible from computer nodes.
Note
When performing remote programming or monitoring from CX-Programmer
over a SYSMAC LINK Network, set the frame length to a maximum of 542
bytes using the network settings of the PLC connected to CX-Programmer. If
the frame length is set to 543 bytes or over, the user program and other data
cannot be transferred.
125
SECTION 8
Troubleshooting
Information to help identify and correct errors that might occur is provided in this section.
8-1
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
8-1-1
Error Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
8-1-2
Probable Causes and Remedies of Response Code Errors . . . . . . .
131
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
8-2-1
Error Log Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
8-2-2
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
8-2-3
Reading and Clearing Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
8-3
Polling Node Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
8-4
Node Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
8-2
127
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
8-1
Troubleshooting
This section explains errors that may occur and how to solve them.
8-1-1
Error Indications
You can check possible system errors using the indicators on the front panel
of the SYSMAC LINK Unit. The tables below list error conditions, their probable cause, and possible remedies.
RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators
Indicators
RUN
Error
log
ERC
ERH
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
---
---
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Both bit 08 (node
address setting error)
and bit 15 (error log
information) are ON.
Both bit 01 (data link
table error) and bit 15
(error log information) are ON.
0214
Hex
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
INS
CPU Bus Unit CIO
Area error
information
Not lit
Probable cause
Remedy
Unit is participating in --network normally.
Power to PLC is
Check the voltage, and check
turned OFF.
that power is being supplied
normally.
SYSMAC LINK Unit
mounting is loose.
SYSMAC LINK Unit
mounting position is
incorrect.
Firmly fix the SYSMAC LINK
Unit to the Backplane.
Refer to 2-3 Mounting to
Backplanes, then mount the
Unit correctly.
SYSMAC LINK Unit is Replace the SYSMAC LINK
faulty.
Unit if the indicators fail to
light even when mounted to
another PLC.
SYSMAC LINK Unit is Replace the SYSMAC LINK
broken.
Unit if the ERC indicator fails
to light even when mounted
to another PLC.
Node address setting Correct the node addresses
is out of range.
to within the range of 1 to 62,
then turn ON the power
again.
Communications con- Replace the SYSMAC LINK
troller error.
Unit.
---
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
---
Not lit
Both bit 09 (duplicate 0211
node address setting Hex
error) and bit 15 (error
log information) are
ON.
Table contains dupli- Change the settings so that
cate node addresses. there are no duplicate node
addresses in the same network, then turn ON the power
again.
Wrong connection to Check the network, and
network (optical fiber reconnect the cables coronly).
rectly.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
---
---
---
---
The I/O table in the
Set the I/O table correctly.
CPU Unit has not
been created, or contains an error.
Table contains dupli- Change the settings so that
cate unit numbers.
there are no duplicate unit
numbers at the same PLC
(including any on CS-series
Expansion Racks), then turn
ON the power again.
128
0210
Hex
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
RUN
Lit
Indicators
ERC
ERH
---
Lit
INS
---
CPU Bus Unit CIO
Area error
information
Error
log
CPU Unit error.
Both bit 00 (network
parameter error) and
bit 15 (error log information) are ON.
0012
Hex
CPU Bus Unit settings area network
parameters data is
corrupted.
021A
Hex
Network parameter
settings contain an
error, or the local
node address
exceeds the network
parameters maximum node address.
PLC Bus Unit system
settings area data link
tables data is corrupted.
Correct the network parameters correctly.
The data link table
settings contain an
error.
Correct the data link tables,
or delete the data link tables
if not using them.
Both bit 02 (routing
0012
table error) and bit 15 Hex
(error log information) are ON.
021A
Hex
PLC parameter area
routing tables data is
corrupted.
The routing table settings contain an error.
---
---
Terminating resistors
are not mounted correctly (coaxial only).
Reset the routing tables. If
the error reoccurs, replace
the PLC CPU Unit.
Correct the routing tables, or
delete the routing tables if
not using them.
Mount terminating resistors
on both end nodes of the
SYSMAC LINK network.
---
---
The cable is not connected correctly.
Connect the cable connections, then reconnect the
cable correctly.
---
---
Node address
exceeds network
parameters maximum node address.
Either correct the network
parameters maximum node
address using CX-Net in CXProgrammer, or set the node
address to within the maximum node address.
---
---
---
---
No other nodes exist. Be sure that there are a minimum of two active nodes in
the network.
No node is set as the Set a Unit as the polling
polling node.
node.
021A
Hex
---
---
Not lit
Note
Remedy
Bit 15 (error log infor- 0001
mation) is ON.
Hex
Both bit 01 (data link 0012
table error) and bit 15 Hex
(error log information) are ON.
Lit
Probable cause
Refer to the PLC operation
manual, and clear the error. If
the error reoccurs, replace
the CPU Unit.
Correct the network parameters. If the error reoccurs,
replace the PLC CPU Unit.
Correct the data link tables. If
the error reoccurs, replace
the PLC CPU Unit.
Calculate the location of the error information in the CPU Bus Unit as follows:
CIO 1500 + unit number x 25 + 1 word.
129
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
LNK Indicator
Data Links Won’t Start
For the data links to operate, first the SYSMAC LINK Units must be operating
and participating in the network. First, check the LNK indicator status by referring to RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators above, and then use the following
table.
LNK
indicator
Lit
Not lit
Flashing
Rapid
flashing
Probable cause
Remedy
Data links operating normally.
---
The local node has not been entered in the refresh
parameters in the data link tables.
An error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the startup
node.
Add the local node to the refresh parameters, then
start the data links.
Refer to the PLC operation manual, eliminate the
error, and start the data links. If the error reoccurs,
replace the CPU Unit.
The data link tables contain an error.
Communications cycle time in the data link tables is
is too short.
Correct the data link tables, and restart the data links.
Either use the automatic setting or increase the setting manually (see note).
Note
In this case, the error log (error code 021D Hex) will be stored. Refer to 8-2
Error Log for details.
Nodes Not Participate in Data Links
For nodes to participate in the data links, first the SYSMAC LINK Units must
be operating and participating in the network. First, check the LNK indicator
status by referring to RUN, ERC, ERH, and INS Indicators above, and then
use the following table.
LNK
indicator
Lit
Not lit
Probable cause
Flashing
Data links operating normally.
The local node has not been entered in the refresh
parameters in the data link tables.
The data link tables contain an error.
Rapid
flashing
Communications cycle time in the data link tables is
is too short.
Note
130
Remedy
--Add the local node to the refresh parameters, then
restart the data links.
Correct the data link tables, and then start the data
links.
Either use the automatic setting or increase the setting manually (see note).
In this case, the error log (error code 021D Hex) will be stored. Refer to 8-2
Error Log for details.
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
8-1-2
Probable Causes and Remedies of Response Code Errors
The table below lists the probable causes of response code errors when using
the SEND(90), RECV(98), and CMND(490) instructions. (Refer to 6-2-4 Communications Ports for details on where the SEND(90), RECV(98), and
CMND(490) instructions response codes are stored.)
The 6th, 7th, and 15th bits of the response codes may be ON. When the 15th
bit is ON, a network relay error has occurred. Refer to Network Relay Errors
below for remedies. When the 6th or 7th bit is ON, an error has occurred in
the destination CPU Unit. Refer to the CPU Unit operation manual, and clear
the error in the destination CPU Unit. The following table gives the meanings
of the response codes.
Main code
1: Nonfatal CPU Unit Error Flag
1: Relay Error Flag
Sub-code
1: Fatal CPU Unit Error Flag
Upon receipt of some commands, the destination node will issue a request to
another node; the other node is referred to as the third node.
Main code
00: Normal completion
01: Local node error
02: Destination node
error
Subcode
00
01
Probable cause
--Service was interrupted
Remedy
--Check the contents of the destination transmission area of third node.
Add to Network.
01
Local node not part of Network
02
Token time-out, node address too high
Set the local node’s node address below
the maximum node address
03
Number of transmit retries exceeded
04
Maximum number of frames exceeded
Check communications with internode echo
test. If the test fails, check network.
Either check the execution of events in the
network and reduce the number of events
occurring in one cycle, or increase the maximum number of frames.
05
Node address setting error (range)
06
Node address duplication error
01
Destination node not part of Network
02
Check the destination node’s node address.
03
No node with the specified node
address
Third node not part of Network
04
Busy error, destination node busy
05
Response time-out, message packet
was corrupted by noise
Increase the number of transmit retry
attempts or re-evaluate the system so that
the destination node is not so busy receiving data.
Increase the number of transmit retry
attempts. Perform an internode echo test to
check noise level.
Response time-out, response watchdog timer interval too short
Make sure the node address is within the
specified range and that there are no duplicate node addresses.
Make sure that there are no duplicate node
addresses.
Add to Network.
Check the third node’s node address.
Increase the value for the response watchdog timer interval.
131
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
Main code
Subcode
03: Communications con- 01
troller error
02
04
04: Not executable
01
02
05: Routing error
10: Command format
error
01
Error occurred in the communications
controller, ERC indicator is lit
Take corrective action, referring to communications controller errors and remedies
table at end of this section.
CPU error occurred in the PLC at the
destination node
Node address setting error
Clear the error in the CPU (refer to the
PLC’s operation manuals).
Make sure the node address is within specified range and that there are no duplicate
node addresses.
An undefined command has been
Check the command code.
used.
Cannot process command because the Check the unit model and version.
specified unit model or version is
wrong.
02
03
Routing table error
04
The maximum number of relay nodes
(2) was exceeded in the command.
Redesign the network or reconsider the
routing table to reduce the number of relay
nodes in the command.
01
The command is longer than the max.
permissible length.
Check the command format of the command and set it correctly.
02
The command is shorter than min. per- Check the command format of the commissible length.
mand and set it correctly.
03
The designated number of data items
differs from the actual number.
Check the number of items and the data,
and make sure that they agree.
04
An incorrect command format has
been used.
An incorrect header has been used.
(The local node’s relay table or relay
node’s local network table is wrong.)
Check the command format of the command and set it correctly.
Set the routing table correctly.
Set the destination node address in the
routing table.
Set the source nodes, destination nodes,
and relay nodes in the routing table.
Set the routing table correctly.
01
A correct memory area code has not
Check the command’s memory area code
been used or Expansion Data Memory and set the appropriate code.
is not available.
02
The access size specified in the command is wrong, or the first address is
an odd number.
Set the correct access size for the command.
03
The first address is in an inaccessible
area.
Set a first address that is in an accessible
area.
04
The end of specified word range
exceeds the acceptable range.
Check the acceptable limits of the data area
and set the word range within the limits.
06
A non-existent program number has
been specified.
The sizes of data items in the command block are wrong.
The IOM break function cannot be executed because it is already being executed.
The response block is longer than the
max. permissible length.
An incorrect parameter code has been
specified.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
Check the command data and be sure that
the sizes of the data items are correct.
Either abort the current IOM break function
processing, or wait until it is completed and
execute the command.
Check the command format and set the
number of items correctly.
Check the command data and reenter it correctly.
09
0A
0B
0C
132
Remedy
Destination node address is not set in
the routing table.
Routing table is not registered.
05
11: Parameter error
Probable cause
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
Main code
20: Read not possible
Subcode
02
03
04
Probable cause
The program area is protected.
Remedy
Execute the instruction again after issuing
the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
command.
The registered table does not exist or is Set or reset the registered table.
incorrect.
The corresponding data does not exist. ---
05
A non-existing program number has
been specified.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
06
A non-existing file has been specified.
Check whether the correct file name was
used.
07
A verification error has occurred.
01
The specified area is read-only or is
write-protected.
Check whether the memory contents are
correct and replace if incorrect.
If the specified area is read-only, the write
cannot be performed. If it is write-protected,
turn off the write-protect switch and execute
the instruction again.
02
The program area is protected.
03
The number of files exceeds the maximum permissible.
05
06
A non-existing program number has
been specified.
A non-existent file has been specified.
07
The specified file already exists.
Change the name of the file and execute
the instruction again.
22: Not executable in cur- 01
rent mode
02
The mode is wrong (executing).
The mode is wrong (stopped).
Check the operating mode.
Check the operating mode.
03
04
The PLC is in PROGRAM mode.
The PLC is in DEBUG mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
05
06
The PLC is in MONITOR mode.
The PLC is in RUN mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
Check the PLC’s mode.
07
The specified node is not the control
node.
The mode is wrong and the step cannot be executed.
A file device does not exist where specified.
The specified memory does not exist.
Check which node is the control node.
21: Write not possible
08
23: No Unit
01
02
24: Start/stop not possible
03
01
No clock exists.
The data link table either hasn’t been
created or is incorrect.
Execute the instruction again after issuing
the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR
command.
Write the file(s) again after erasing
unneeded files, or use a different disk or
Memory Card that has free space.
Check the program number and be sure
that it is set correctly.
---
Check whether the step has active status or
not.
The Memory Card or disk is not installed.
Check the specifications of the installed file
memory.
Check the model number.
Set the data link table correctly.
133
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
Main code
25: Unit error
Subcode
02
03
04
05
06
Parity/checksum error occurred
because of incorrect data.
I/O setting error (The registered I/O
configuration differs from the actual.)
Remedy
Transfer correct data into memory.
Either change the actual configuration to
match the registered one, or generate the I/
O table again.
Too many I/O points
Redesign the system to remain within permissible limits.
CPU bus error (An error occurred dur- Check the unit and cable connections and
ing data transfer between the CPU and issue the ERROR CLEAR command.
a CPU Bus Unit.)
I/O duplication error (A rack number,
Check the system’s settings and eliminate
unit number, or I/O word allocation has any duplication.
been duplicated.)
07
I/O bus error (An error occurred during Check the unit and cable connections and
data transfer between the CPU and an issue the ERROR CLEAR command.
I/O Unit.)
09
SYSMAC BUS/2 error (An error
occurred during SYSMAC BUS/2 data
transfer.)
0A
Special I/O Unit error (An error
Check the unit and cable connections and
occurred during CPU Bus Unit data
issue the ERROR CLEAR command.
transfer.)
Duplication in SYSMAC BUS word allo- Check and regenerate the I/O table.
cation.
0D
134
Probable cause
0F
A memory error has occurred in internal memory, in the Memory Card, or in
Expansion DM during the error check.
10
Terminator not connected in SYSMAC
BUS System.
Check the unit and cable connections and
issue the ERROR CLEAR command.
If the error occurred in internal memory or
the EM Unit, correct the data in the command an execute it again.
If the error occurred in a Memory Card or
EM used for file memory, the file data has
been corrupted. Execute the MEMORY
CARD FORMAT command.
If the above remedies do not eliminate the
error, replace the faulty memory.
Connect the terminator correctly.
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
Main code
Subcode
01
26: Command error
Remedy
The specified area is not protected.
This response code will be returned if
an attempt is made to clear protection
on an area that is not protected.
The program area is not protected, so it is
not necessary to clear protection.
02
An incorrect password has been speci- Specify a password that is registered.
fied.
04
The specified area is protected.
Execute the command again after the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command.
05
The service is being executed.
Execute the command again after the service has been completed or aborted.
06
07
The service is not being executed.
Service cannot be executed from local
node because the local node is not part
of the data link.
The communications cycle time in the
data link table is too short. (The LNK
indicator will be flashing rapidly.)
Execute the service if necessary.
Execute the service from a node that is part
of the data link.
09
Service cannot be executed because
the necessary settings have not been
made in the command data.
Check the command format and make the
necessary settings.
0A
The specified action or transition number has already been registered.
Execute the command again using an
action or transition number that has not
been registered.
0B
Cannot clear error because the cause
of the error still exists.
Eliminate the cause of the error and execute the ERROR CLEAR command.
01
The access right is held by another
device.
Execute the command again after the
access right has been released.
(The command can be executed after the
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE or
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE command is
completed. Releasing the access right
might affect processes in progress at the
node that held the access right.)
08
30: Access right error
Probable cause
Network Relay Errors
Either use the automatic setting or increase
the setting manually.
For network relay errors using SEND(90) or RECV(98), check the path of the
command using the routing tables and the nature of the error using the
response code to eliminate the cause of the error.
For network relay errors using CMND(490), the location of the relay error is
recorded in the second and third words of the response, as shown below.
Bit
First word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
Command code
Bit
Second word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
Main response code
4
3
2
Sub response code
1: Relay Error Flag
1: Nonfatal CPU Unit Error Flag
1: Fatal CPU Unit Error Flag
Bit
Third word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Error network address
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Error node address
Network error address: 00 to 7F (0 to 127)
Node error address
SYSMAC LINK: 01 to 3E (1 to 62)
Controller Link: 01 to 20 (1 to 32)
135
Section 8-1
Troubleshooting
Ethernet:
01 to 7E (1 to 126)
SYSMAC NET: 01 to 7E (1 to 126)
Relay Errors
A relay error is caused when a command fails to reach the Unit to which it has
been sent. A relay error can be caused either by data failing to be passed
between Communications Units connected over a network (see example 1),
or by data being passed from a Communications Unit to a Unit that is not a
Communications Unit (e.g., to a CPU Unit) (see example 2). A relay error may
also occur if the destination node or the next relay node does not exist.
Example 1:
Data fails to be passed between Communications Units due to a routing table
error.
(2)
(1)
Send
Reply
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
SLK: SYSMAC LINK Unit
ETN: Ethernet Unit
Example 2:
Data fails to be passed from a Communications Unit to the CPU Unit due to
the Communications Unit being offline from servicing.
(2)
(1)
Send
Reply
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
SLK SYSMAC LINK Unit
Example 3:
Destination node or relay node does not exist.
(1)
(2)
Send
Reply
136
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
SLK: SYSMAC LINK Unit
ENT Ethernet Unit
Section 8-2
Error Log
1,2,3...
1. Send data fails to be passed.
2. Relay error and response code returned to source.
Check the node with the error, then examine the error itself using the
response code, then remedy the problem.
8-2
Error Log
The error log records errors that occur in the SYSMAC LINK Unit and the time
they occur. The error log can be read or cleared using the CX-Net, or the message service (FINS commands for the SYSMAC LINK Unit.)
8-2-1
Error Log Table
Errors are recorded in an error log table in the Unit’s RAM, with one record for
each error and a maximum of 39 records.
Errors of significance are also recorded in the Unit’s EEPROM so that when
the power to the Unit is turned OFF or reset, a record of the error will remain.
(The error log table in EEPROM automatically reads the Unit’s RAM when the
power is turned ON again.)
Item
Specification
No. of records
Data code
39 max.
Binary (Times are in BCD)
Length of each record
Configuration of records
10 bytes
Error code: 2 bytes (Refer to page 138)
Detail code: 2 bytes (Refer to page 138)
Time: 6 bytes (Refer to the following page)
From the oldest record to the most recent.
Record order
If the number of records exceeds 39, the oldest record will be deleted and the
most recent error recorded.
Error Log Table Configuration
0
Error code
Detail
Min
S
Day
Hour
Year
Month
Record
(Oldest)
Error code
Detail
Min
S
Day
Hour
Year
Month
Record
Error code
Detail
Min
S
Day
Hour
Year
Month
Record
(Newest)
137
Section 8-2
Error Log
Time Information
The time is recorded in BCD with one byte each for the year (the rightmost
two digits), month, day, hour, seconds, and minutes of the time the error
occurred.
Note
(1) The PLC’s time information can be read and used in the SYSMAC LINK
Unit. When the time cannot be read from the PLC, all error log times will
be set to 0. This can occur for PLC startup errors, unit number errors,
CPU Unit errors, or PLC model errors. When error logs without times are
read from the CX-Net, they will be dated 0 s, 0 min, 0 hr, 0 day, 0 month,
2000.
(2) When replacing the battery for CS-series PLCs, it will be necessary to
switch the power supply ON and reset the internal clock. If the internal
clock is not reset, time information in the error log will not be recorded correctly.
(3) The time information will be all zeros for CQM1H-series PLCs unless a
Memory Cassette with a clock is mounted in the CPU Unit. The time information will be all zeros in the year 2000 if it is read from Support Software.
8-2-2
Error Codes
The following table lists the error codes (in 4-digit hexadecimal) and the contents of the errors.
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
Written to
EEPROM
0001
Hex
PLC watchdog timer error
1st byte
00 Hex
0002
Hex
PLC service monitor error
Monitor time (unit: ms)
Check operating environment. Yes
0004
Hex
CPU Bus Unit ID number error
00 Hex
Check I/O Connecting
Cables.
0006
Hex
CPU Unit error
000E
Hex
000F
Hex
0010
Hex
I/O Bus error
0011
Hex
PLC initialization error
(Time out)
Bit 11: No relevant Unit in I/ Check the Unit number setO table.
tings. Recreate the I/O table.
Bit 12: Hardware test unit
number recognized.
Bit 13: Incorrect unit number.
Bit 14: Duplicated unit number.
00 Hex fixed
00 Hex fixed Check the operating environment.
Check the operating environment.
Reduce the number of CPU
Bus Units mounted on each
CPU Unit by one.
Check the operating environment.
138
PLC initialization error
PLC Setup exceeds capacity
2nd byte
00 Hex
Correction
00 Hex
Replace PLC’s CPU Unit.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Section 8-2
Error Log
Error
code
Contents
0012
Hex
CPU Unit memory error
0013
Hex
CPU Unit write-protected
0101
Hex
Transmission failed; local node
not in Network
0103
Hex
Transmission failed; retry count
exceeded
0104
Hex
Transmission failed; maximum
number of frames exceeded.
0105
Hex
Transmission failed; node
address incorrect
0106
Hex
Transmission failed; redundant
node address
0107
Hex
Transmission failed; destination
node not in Network
0108
Hex
Transmission failed; specified
Unit does not exist
Detail code
1st byte
2nd byte
01 Hex: Read
error
02 Hex: Write
error
01 Hex:
Data link
table
02 Hex: Network parameters
03 Hex:
Routing
table
04 Hex: PLC
Setup Area
Command block
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Source Network address
Bit 15:
OFF
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Destination node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
Bit 15:
ON
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
Correction
Written to
EEPROM
Set the appropriate data.
Yes
Release the CPU Unit write
protection.
Yes
Refer to page 8-1-1 Error Indi- No
cations and place the local
node into Network.
Using the CX-Net or FINS
No
commands, run echoback
tests and check operating
environment if errors occur.
Reduce the number of events No
per communications cycle or
increase the maximum number of network parameter
frames.
Check node address settings No
to be sure they are within
range and unique.
Correct node addresses so
No
that they are unique within the
same Network.
No
Refer to 8-1-1 Error Indications and place destination
node into Network.
Check the unit address and
unit number of destination.
No
139
Section 8-2
Error Log
Error
code
0109
Hex
Contents
010D
Hex
Command block
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Transmission failed; communicaSource Network address
tions controller error
Bit 15:
OFF
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Destination node address
Transmission failed; PLC error
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
Transmission failed; unit number Bit 15:
incorrect
ON
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
Transmission failed; destination
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
address incorrect
010E
Hex
010A
Hex
010B
Hex
010C
Hex
Transmission failed; destination
busy
Detail code
1st byte
2nd byte
Correction
Written to
EEPROM
Set the data link tables com- No
munications cycle time automatically, or increase the
settings manually.
Conduct an echoback test
Yes
and if the effects of noise are
considerable, reconsider the
operating environment.
Restart the SYSMAC LINK
Unit. If the error occurs again,
replace the Unit.
Refer to the PLC operating
manual. If the error occurs
again, replace the PLC.
No
Check unit number settings to No
be sure they are within range
and unique.
Check routing tables.
No
Transmission failed; routing
tables not registered
Check routing tables.
No
010F
Hex
0110
Hex
Transmission failed; routing table
error
Transmission failed; too many
relay points
Check routing tables.
No
No
0111
Hex
0112
Hex
0113
Hex
Transmission failed; command
packet too long
Transmission failed; header
error.
Transmission failed; I/O setting
error
Check routing tables and system configuration. Do not try
to access Networks separated by more than one other
Network.
Be sure to use the FINS command format.
Be sure to use the correct
FINS command format.
Check I/O table accuracy.
0114
Hex
Transmission failed; CPU bus
error
Check Unit and cable connec- No
tions and clear error.
0115
Hex
Transmission failed; redundant I/
O allocations
Check unit numbers for
redundancy within the same
PLC.
0116
Hex
Transmission failed; CPU Bus
Unit error
Check Unit and cable connec- No
tions and clear error.
140
No
No
No
No
Section 8-2
Error Log
Error
code
0117
Hex
Contents
Detail code
1st byte
2nd byte
Written to
EEPROM
Command block
Bits 0 to 7:
Source node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Source Network address
Bit 15:
OFF
Response block
Bits 0 to 7:
Illegal packet discarded
Destination node address
Bits 8 to 14:
Destination Network
address
Bit 15:
ON
(1st byte: bits 8 to 15;
2nd byte, bits 0 to 7)
Number of participating nodes
Network
Number of
decreased (local node still partic- parameters
non-particiipating)
maximum
pating nodes
node address
Number of participating nodes
decreased (local node not participating)
Increase number of retries or
reconfigure system to distribute load.
No
Check for nodes sending illegal packets.
Yes
Check network parameters,
node participation, cables,
and terminating resistance.
No
0208
Hex
Polling node changed
Address of
previous polling node
Address of
new polling
node
Check previous polling node.
No
0209
Hex
Network parameter disagreement error
00 Hex
Address of
polling node
Using the CX-Net, check network parameters.
Yes
020C
Hex
Time out with token
00 Hex
Error status
(see note)
No
0210
Hex
Communications controller send 00 Hex
error
Error status
(see note)
Check network parameters,
node participation, cables,
and terminating resistance.
Replace the SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
0211
Hex
Duplicate address error
00 Hex
Local node
address
No
0214
Hex
Node address setting error
Not specified
Set so that each node
address is used only once
within the same Network.
Check the node address settings and correct them.
0216
Hex
Backup power supply error (Opti- 00 Hex fixed
cal Units only)
Backup
Check the status of the
power sup- backup power supply and
ply error dis- power supply cables.
tinction:
01 Hex: OFF
to ON
02 Hex: ON
to OFF
021A
Hex
Set table logic error
00 Hex
01 Hex: Net- Remake and set the appropri- Yes
work param- ate data.
eters
02 Hex:
Data link
tables
03 Hex:
Routing
tables
021B
Hex
Hardware error
00 Hex
Error status
(see note)
0118
Hex
0206
Hex
0207
Hex
Internal buffer full
Correction
No
Replace the SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
141
Section 8-2
Error Log
Error
code
Contents
Detail code
1st byte
2nd byte
021C
Hex
021D
Hex
Data link error inactive
0220
Hex
0221
Hex
Participating nodes reduced
(removed node information)
Correction
Not set
Data link table communications
cycle time setting error
Restart the SYSMAC LINK
Unit.
CommunicaMinimum
Set the data link tables comtions cycle
possible
munications cycle time autotime set in the communica- matically, or increase the
data link stations cycle
settings manually.
tus (Unit: ms, time setting
2-digit hexa(Unit: ms, 2decimal)
digit hexadecimal)
Node 1 to 16 removed
Check the network parame(correspond to bits 0 to 15)
ters, cables, and terminal
resistance settings.
Node 17 to 32 removed
(correspond to bits 0 to 15)
0222
Hex
Node 33 to 48 removed
(correspond to bits 0 to 15)
0223
Hex
Node 49 to 62 removed
(correspond to bits 0 to 13)
Written to
EEPROM
Yes
Yes
Yes
0300
Hex
Packet discarded
Not set
Conduct an echoback test
and find the cause of the
error.
No
0601
Hex
Unit error
Not set
Check the operating environment.
Yes
Note
(1) Errors indicated by error codes 0101 to 0116 Hex are logged only when
the frame was discarded because transmission was impossible.
(2) Errors indicated by error codes 0220 to 0223 Hex are logged at the same
time as error code 0206 or 0207 Hex (participating nodes reduced). You
can determine the nodes removed from the network. For example, if node
16 is removed, the following error codes will be generated.
Error code
0206 Hex
0221 Hex
Error Status
Information
3E01 Hex
0001 Hex
Meaning
Single node removed from system.
Node 16 removed from system.
The status of each bit indicates that an error has occurred as given in the diagram below.
1: Token timeout error
1: Polling timeout error
1: Communications controller hardware error
1: Polling node was changed
1: Nodes in Network changed (added or removed)
1: Communications controller send error
1: Node address duplication error
8-2-3
Reading and Clearing Error Logs
Error logs can be read or cleared using the CX-Net, or the message service.
The following commands can be used for the message service.
Reading an Error Log
Send the ERROR LOG READ FINS command (command code 2102) to the
appropriate node. Refer to 6-4-11 ERROR LOG READ.
Clearing an Error Log
Send the ERROR LOG CLEAR FINS command (command code 2103) to the
appropriate node. Refer to 6-4-12 ERROR LOG CLEAR.
142
Section 8-3
Polling Node Backup
8-3
Polling Node Backup
If the polling node on the SYSMAC LINK Network has an error, the polling
node backup function of the SYSMAC LINK Unit will reconstruct the network
so that another Unit takes its place as the polling node. Refer to the following
diagram. The initial polling node is the Unit assigned node address 1. If the
Unit with node address 1 has an error, the node that has the next smallest
node address will automatically become the new polling node.
SLK: SYSMAC LINK Unit
SLK
Node 1
SLK
Node 2
PLC
PLC
Previous polling
node
SLK
Node N
PLC
PLC
New polling node
Note
8-4
SLK
Node 3
While the network is being reconstructed, no communications are possible. If
the data link function was active, all data will remain at its present values.
When the network has been reconstructed, the data links will be reactivated.
The approximate time required for the reconstruction of the network can be
computed as follows:
(Address of new polling node + 1) x 20 ms + maximum node address x 1 ms
Node Bypass
Optical SYSMAC LINK networks can be connected to a backup power supply.
If a backup power supply is provided, the node bypass function of the SYSMAC LINK Units will operate whenever a node or node power supply fails. The
failing node will be bypassed in the network and the overall network will continue operating, preventing total network shutdown.
In this example, if the Unit assigned node address 3 has an error, the node
bypass function will eliminate this node from the network and the remainder of
the network will continue functioning.
Optical transmission path
SLK11
Node 1
SLK11
Node 2
SLK11
Node 3
SLK11
Node 4
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
Error occurred
Backup power supply
SLK11: SYSMAC LINK Unit
Note
(1) With systems using optical transmission paths with a backup power supply, the backup power supply is given priority. Turn ON the backup power
supply first, then turn ON the PLC power supply, or turn ON both the
backup power supply and the PLC power supply at the same time. Communications data will be corrupted is the backup power supply is turned
ON and OFF.
143
Node Bypass
Section 8-4
(2) A 24-VDC backup power supply is supplied directly to CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units. With non-CS-series optical fiber SYSMAC LINK Units,
a 100-VAC or 200-VAC backup power supply is supplied using an Auxiliary Power Supply Unit mounted on the same Rack.
144
SECTION 9
Unit Replacement
The SYSMAC LINK Unit is a network device. If the Unit is damaged, it will affect the entire Network, so always ensure
repairs are undertaken immediately. We recommend that you have a spare SYSMAC LINK Unit on hand so that repairs
may be conducted quickly.
This section describes the replacement procedure and provides cautions for Unit replacement.
9-1
Replacing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
9-1-1
Settings after Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
9-1-2
Resetting Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
9-2
Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
9-3
Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
145
Section 9-1
Replacing the Unit
9-1
Replacing the Unit
Observe the following precautions when replacing the Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power before replacing the Unit.
• Check that the new Unit is not faulty.
• If you suspect that a poor connection is the cause of a malfunction, clean
the connectors using a clean, soft cloth and industrial-grade alcohol.
Remove any lint or threads left from the cloth, and remount the Unit.
• When returning a faulty Unit for repairs, always attach a detailed fault
report to the Unit and return to you nearest OMRON outlet as listed at the
back of this manual.
Note
(1) To prevent faulty operation be sure to turn OFF the power to all nodes before replacing the Unit.
(2) When replacing the Unit, do not reconnect that node to the Network before carrying out the procedures listed below. In particular, a node with a
small address will become the polling node and communicate the initial
network parameter status to other nodes, so there is the chance that network parameters in the entire Network will be damaged.
9-1-1
Settings after Replacement
After replacing a SYSMAC LINK Unit, reset the hardware switches, software
switches, and data link tables, and wire it in the same manner as the previous
Unit. This section describes settings that require particular care. Refer to the
Unit replacement methods later in this section for details on replacing the Unit.
Note
(1) After replacing the CPU Unit, transfer important data, such as DM and
Holding Area contents, to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation.
Depending on the program, accidents can occur as a result of incorrect
DM or Holding Area contents.
(2) CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units store data such as data link tables, network parameters, and routing tables in the CPU Unit. When replacing the
CPU Unit, reset these settings using the CX-Net in CX-Programmer.
9-1-2
Resetting Network Parameters
When a CPU Unit has been replaced in a CS-series SYSMAC LINK Unit, it is
necessary to reset the network parameters, data link tables, and routing
tables. This section describes the resetting procedure for the network parameters. For details on data link table resetting procedures, refer to 4-5 Creating
Data Links and for routing table resetting procedures, refer to 5-2 Routing
Tables.
1,2,3...
1. Network parameters are read from the polling node when the Network is
activated and this information is distributed to all nodes in the Network. For
this reason, set the polled/polling node setting in the DM parameter area
for the node replaced to a polled node before reconnecting the Unit to the
SYSMAC LINK Network.
DM 30000 + 100 × n
n = Unit number
−: Other settings
Polled node/polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
2. Turn the power OFF once, connect the SYSMAC LINK Network and turn
the power ON again. Check that the Unit is participating in the Network.
146
Section 9-2
Replacement Procedure
If the INS indicator is lit and the ERC and ERH indicators are OFF, then the
Unit is in the Network.
3. Return the Polled node/polling node setting of the node in which the Unit
was replaced to “polling node.”
DM 30000 + 100 × n
n = Unit number
−: Other settings
Polled node/Polling node 0: Polling node
1: Polled node
4. Restart the SYSMAC LINK Unit or turn ON the power again. Check that
the Unit is participating in the Network.
If the INS indicator is lit and the ERC and ERH indicators are not lit, then
the Unit is in the Network.
Note
(1) Stop the data links before restarting the SYSMAC LINK Unit. Check again
that the network parameters for the node that has been replaced are the
same as for the other nodes.
(2) When replacing the Unit, do not reconnect that node to the Network before carrying out the procedures listed below. In particular, a node with a
small address will become the polling node and communicate the initial
network parameter status to other nodes, so there is the chance that network parameters in the entire Network will be damaged.
9-2
Replacement Procedure
Note
1,2,3...
In CS-series SYSMAC LINK Units, data is stored in the battery-powered
backup SRAM in the CPU Unit. Consequently, a SYSMAC LINK Unit will function as before simply by making the appropriate hardware settings, even if it is
replaced. The data link tables and routing tables must be reset, however, if the
CPU Unit is replaced.
1. Turn OFF all the nodes in the SYSMAC LINK Network.
2. Disconnect the communications cable from the SYSMAC LINK Unit you
wish to replace, and remove the Unit.
3. Mount the new SYSMAC LINK Unit on the CPU Unit, and connect the communications cable (refer to SECTION 2 Unit Components and Switch Settings).
4. Set the unit number, node address, and terminating resistance in the new
SYSMAC LINK Unit to the same as the previous one (Refer to SECTION
2 Unit Components and Switch Settings).
5. Turn ON the power to all nodes in the SYSMAC LINK Network, except to
the CPU Unit for the SYSMAC LINK Unit that has been replaced.
6. Check that all other nodes are operating normally.
7. Read the network parameters using CX-Net in CX-Programmer, and check
that the network settings are correct.
8. Start the data links from the data link startup node if the data links do not
start automatically.
9. Check that the data links are operating normally using the data link status
monitor in CX-Net in CX-Programmer.
147
Section 9-3
Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21
9-3
Using the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21
The CX-Programmer and CX-Net in CX-Programmer cannot perform remote
monitoring/programming or create data link tables for the C200H-SLK21 or
C1000H-SLK21. Replace the C200H-SLK21 or C1000H-SLK21 with the most
recent SYSMAC LINK Unit, as shown in the following table.
Model not compatible
with CX-Programmer or
CX-Net
C200H-SLK21
C1000H-SLK21
Note
148
Corresponding model
compatible with CXProgrammer or CX-Net
C200H-SLK21-V1
Notes
Production stopped in
1992.
C200HS-SLK22
Production stopped in
1996.
C200HW-SLK23/24
(See note.)
Currently on sale.
C1000H-SLK21-V1
Currently on sale.
The C200HW-SLK23/24 can be used for C200H and C200HS PLCs.
SECTION 10
Inspection and Maintenance
This section contains information describing peri odic inspections required by the System.
10-1 Periodic Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
10-2 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
10-3 Tools and Equipment Needed for Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
149
Section 10-1
Periodic Inspections
10-1 Periodic Inspections
SYSMAC LINK Units must be inspected on a regular basis to ensure correct
operation. SYSMAC LINK Units are built primarily of solid-state components
and contain almost no parts subject to wear. Nevertheless, the life span of
some solid-state components can be shortened as a result of adverse environmental conditions.
We recommend that the following points be checked at least once every 6 to
12 months as part of a standard inspection program. Ambient conditions
should be checked more frequently. If any of these items deviate from the prescribed standards, take appropriate action to correct the condition.
Inspection item
Environmental conditions
Mounting conditions
Inspection contents
Standard operation
Inspection method
Check the ambient tempera- 0 to 55°C
Thermometer
ture and the temperature
inside the unit.
Check the ambient humidity 10 to 90% (Check there is no Hygrometer
and the humidity inside the
condensation.)
unit.
Check there is no dust.
Check the SYSMAC LINK
Unit is firmly fixed.
Clean away any dust.
Tighten any loose Units.
Eyesight
Eyesight
Check the cable connectors
have been fully inserted.
Tighten any loose cables.
Eyesight
Check that external wiring
screws are not loose.
Tighten any loose screws.
Phillips screwdriver
Check that external wiring
cables are not frayed.
Inspect the wiring externally
for any abnormalities.
Eyesight
We recommend that users have backup Units available to make repairs and
minimize down-time if a problem occurs in a SYSMAC LINK Unit.
10-2 Handling Precautions
Please observe the following precautions in the event of a problem:
• Always turn OFF the power when replacing a SYSMAC LINK Unit.
• If a SYSMAC LINK Unit fails, replace it with a new one and immediately
verify that the new Unit is working properly.
• When returning a malfunctioning SYSMAC LINK Unit for repair, please
attach a detailed description of the problem to the Unit and return it to the
sales office nearest you (see listing at the end of this manual).
• If you suspect that a poor connection is the cause of a malfunction, clean
the connectors using a clean, soft cloth and industrial-grade alcohol.
Remove any lint or threads left from the cloth, and re-mount the SYSMAC
LINK Unit.
10-3 Tools and Equipment Needed for Inspection
The following tools and equipment will be needed to perform inspection and
adjustments.
• Assorted flat-blade and Phillips screwdrivers
• Circuit tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial-grade alcohol and clean cotton cloth
• Synchroscope
• Pen-chart recording oscilloscope
• Thermometer, hygrometer
150
Appendix A
Standard Models
SYSMAC LINK Units
Name
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Specification
Optical fiber cable
Model
CS1W-SLK11
Coaxial cable
CS1W-SLK21
Applicable PLCs
CS1H-CPU67H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1H-CPU67(-V1)
CS1H-CPU66(-V1)
CS1H-CPU65(-V1)
CS1H-CPU64(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45(-V1)
CS1G-CPU44(-V1)
CS1G-CPU43(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42(-V1)
Cables
Optical Fiber Cable (for CS1W-SLK11)
Optical fiber cables with connectors. Use the following H-PCF cables:
Name
H-PCF Cable (2-core optical
fiber cable)
Black
Orange
Specification
10 m
Model
S3200-HCCB101
50 m
100 m
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
500 m
1,000 m
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCB103
10 m
50 m
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
100 m
500 m
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
Optical connector
1,000 m
Use when connecting nodes to cables.
In-line adapter
Use in cable relays.
S3200-HCCO103
S3200-COCF2071
(See note.)
S3200-COIAT2000
Note Production of the S3200-COCF2011 Connector has been stopped. Use the S3200-COCF2071 as a
replacement.
151
Appendix A
Standard Models
When ordering, specify the optical fiber cable type by adding codes to the model number as shown below.
S3200-H(((((((
Kind of cable
B: Cord
C: Cable
Power supply line
Color of fiber
L: With power supply line
B: Black
C: Without power supply line O: Orange
Length
(((
A B
(A/10) x 10B m
Option
Blank: Standard
N:
Without tension member
Tools
The following tools are required when preparing the cables yourself.
Name
Model
Model
Optical Fiber Assembly Kit
Optical Power Tester
--Tester set
CAK-0057 (See note.)
S3200-CAT2700
Master Fiber
Head unit
---
S3200-CAT2702
S3200-CAT2001H
Note Use the CAK-0057 (made by Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.) to assemble the S3200-COCF2071
Connector. (Production of the S3200-CAK1062 Assembly Tool has been stopped.) The S3200COCF2071 Connector can be assembled using the S3200-CAK1062 by adding the JRFK-57PLUS
(made by Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.).
Coaxial Cable (for CS1W-SLK21)
The following coaxial cables are recommended:
Name
Coaxial cable
5C-2V
Maker
Fujikura Densen
F-Adapter
ECXF5C-2V
C1000H-CE001
Hitachi Densen
OMRON
Terminal Resistor
C1000H-TER01
152
Model
Appendix B
Dimensions
CS1W-SLK11 Optical SYSMAC LINK Unit
(Unit: mm)
153
Dimensions
Appendix B
CS1W-SLK21 Coaxial SYSMAC LINK Unit
(Unit: mm)
154
Appendix C
Related Auxiliary Area Information
This appendix lists the functions for the SYSMAC LINK Unit in the Auxiliary Area of the CS-series CPU Units.
Word(s)
A202
Bit(s)
00 to 07
Function
Communications Port Enabled (Network Communications Enabled) Flags
A203 to A210
A219
00 to 15
00 to 07
A302
00 to 15
Port 0 to 7 Completion Codes
Port 0 to 7 Execute Error (Network Communications
Execute Error) Flags
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
A401
A402
13
03
Duplicate Number Error Flag (fatal error)
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag
A410
07
00 to 15
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
CPU Bus Unit Duplicate Number
A417
A427
00 to 15
00 to 15
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit Number Flags
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Unit Number
A501
00 to 15
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Network Status Flags
Bits A20200 through A20207 are turned ON to indicate that the SEND(90), RECV(98), CMND(490) and
PMCR(260) instructions and background execution (CS1-H CPU Units only) can be executed for the corresponding port, 0 through 7. Bits A219200 through A219207 are turned ON to indicate that an error has
occurred in ports 0 through 7, respectively, during data communications using SEND(90), RECV(98),
CMND(490), or PMCR(260).
Port 0 to 7 Response Codes
A203 through A210 contain the response codes for ports 0 through 7, respectively, following data communications using SEND(90), RECV(98), CMND(490), or PMCR.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags
Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the corresponding CS-series CPU Bus Units (Units #0 through
#15, respectively) are initializing.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error Flag and Unit Number
Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CS-series CPU Bus Units actually installed differ from the Units registered
in the I/O table. The unit number of the CS-series CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A427.
Bits A42700 through A42715 correspond to CS-series CPU Bus Units 0 through 15, respectively. When an
error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CS-series CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
Bit A40207 is turned ON when a parity error occurs during the transmission of data between the CPU Unit and
CS-series CPU Bus Units. The unit number of the CS-series CPU Bus Unit involved is written to word A417.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Numbers
Bits A41000 through A41015 correspond to CS-series CPU Bus Units 0 through 15, respectively. When two
CPU Bus Units have the same unit number, the bits corresponding to the unit numbers of the CS-series CPU
Bus Units involved are turned ON.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Duplication Error Flag
Bit A40113 is turned ON when two CS-series CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit number. The
duplicated unit number is indicated in A410.
155
Related Auxiliary Area Information
Appendix C
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit Number Flags
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU Unit and a CS-series CPU Bus Unit, the CS-series
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag (A40207) is turned ON and the bit in A417 corresponding to the unit number of the
Unit where the error occurred is turned ON.
Bits A42200 through A42215 correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 through 15, respectively. When a CPU Bus Unit
Error occurs, the bit corresponding to the unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is turned ON.
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to reset CS-series CPU Bus Units numbers 0 through 15,
respectively. The Restart Bits are turned OFF automatically when restarting is completed.
156
Appendix D
CPU Bus Unit Area Allocations
The CPU Bus Unit Area of the SYSMAC LINK Unit is allocated in the PLC’s memory (bit area) according to the
unit number as follows (25 words are allocated per Unit):
Unit No.
Words
0
CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
Unit No.
Words
8
CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
1
2
CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
9
10
CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
3
4
CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
11
12
CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
5
6
CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
13
14
CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
7
CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
15
CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
Configuration of CPU Bus Unit Area
The configuration of the CPU Bus Unit Area of the SYSMAC LINK Unit is as follows:
Word
+0
System reserved
(1 word)
+1
Error data
(1 word)
Network status
(6 words)
Data link status
(16 words)
Power supply status (CS1W-SLK11 only)
(1 word)
+2
to
+7
+8
to
+23
+24
157
Appendix D
CPU Bus Unit Area Allocations
Error Data
Word: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 0
+1
8
7
0
6
5
4
0
0
0
3
2
1
0
Bit
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
Network parameter error
Data link table error
Routing table error
Communications unit setting error
EEPROM error
Node address setting error
1: Node address duplication error
1: Network parameter disagreement error
1: Communications controller error
Error log data 0: yes/1: no
Network Status (Refer to Section 3)
Words: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 2 to +7
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+2
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
+4
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
+5
−
+6
+7
−
Bit
Each of these numbers stands for the
node address corresponding to the bit.
When the node belongs to the network,
the corresponding bit will be ON. Bits
14 and 15 of word +5 are always OFF.
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Local network address
Local unit address
Local node address
Polling node address
Note If the local node is disconnected from the network, only the bit corresponding to the local node is turned
OFF (i.e., the entire status area is not turned OFF). Also, while the local node is disconnected, the bits
corresponding to the other nodes will not be refreshed, even if actual status changes.
158
Appendix D
CPU Bus Unit Area Allocations
Data Link Status
Words: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 8 to +23
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+8
4th
3rd
2nd
1st
+9
8th
7th
6th
5th
+10
12th
11th
10th
9th
+11
16th
15th
14th
13th
+12
20th
19th
18th
17th
+13
24th
23rd
22nd
21st
+14
28th
27th
26th
25th
+15
32nd
31st
30th
29th
+16
36th
35th
34th
33rd
+17
40th
39th
38th
37th
+18
44th
43rd
42nd
41st
+19
48th
47th
46th
45th
+20
52nd
51st
50th
49th
+21
56th
55th
54th
53rd
+22
60th
59th
58th
57th
62nd
61st
+23
0
Start node address
0 Bit
The configuration of the four-bit data,
registered on the data link table (refresh parameters) in order, expresses the status of each node as follows:
Status of each node
CPU Unit running
CPU Unit error
Communications error
Data link active
Local Node Data Link Active Flag
0: Stopped
1: Active
Note If the Local Node Data Link Active Flag (bit 15 of first word +23) is OFF, the data link status will be maintained as it was immediately before operation stopped. This may not be the same as the actual current
status. When using the data link status, first check that the Local Node Data Link Active Flag is ON.
Power Supply
Word: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 24
Word
+24
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
Bit
0: No power supplied
1: Power supplied (CS1W-SLK11 only)
159
Appendix E
DM Area Allocations
Words in the DM Area are allocated to CS-series CPU Bus Units according to
the unit numbers assigned to them, as shown below. Each Unit is allocated
100 words, of which 1 word is used.
Unit No.
0
Words
D30000
Unit No.
8
Words
D30800
1
2
D30100
D30200
9
10
D30900
D31000
3
4
D30300
D30400
11
12
D31100
D31200
5
6
D30500
D30600
13
14
D31300
D31400
7
D30700
15
D31500
Software Switches (D30000 + 100 × Unit Number)
Data Link Start Bit
Start: Changed from OFF to ON or already ON when power is turned ON
Stop: Changed from ON to OFF
Data Link Mode
00: Manual
01: Automatic for CIO Area only
10: Automatic for DM Area only
11: Automatic for CIO and DM Areas
Number of Send Words per Node
CIO Area
DM Area
00: 4 words
8 words
01: 8 words
16 words
10: 16 words
32 words
11: 32 words
64 words
CPU Bus Unit Settings Initialization (See note)
0: Do not initialize CPU Bus Unit Settings
1: Initialize CPU Bus Unit Settings
Polling Node/Polled Node Bit
0: Polling node
1: Polled node
Note Initializes the network parameters registered in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area in the CPU Unit and
clears the data link tables.
161
Glossary
address
A number used to identify the location of data or programming instructions in
memory or to identify the location of a network or a unit in a network.
advanced instruction
An instruction input with a function code that handles data processing operations within ladder diagrams, as opposed to a basic instruction, which makes
up the fundamental portion of a ladder diagram.
allocation
The process by which the PLC assigns certain bits or words in memory for various functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
analog
Something that represents or can process a continuous range of values as opposed to values that can be represented in distinct increments. Something that
represents or can process values represented in distinct increments is called
digital.
Analog I/O Unit
I/O Units that convert I/O between analog and digital values. An Analog Input
Unit converts an analog input to a digital value for processing by the PLC. An
Analog Output Unit converts a digital value to an analog output.
AND
A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true.
In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF states of
bits or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.
area
See data area and memory area.
area prefix
A one or two letter prefix used to identify a memory area in the PLC. All memory areas except the CIO Area require prefixes to identify addresses in them.
ASCII
Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is used
to code characters for output to printers and other external devices.
asynchronous execution
Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are not synchronized with each other.
Auxiliary Area
A PLC data area allocated to flags and control bits.
auxiliary bit
A bit in the Auxiliary Area.
backup
A copy made of existing data to ensure that the data will not be lost even if the
original data is corrupted or erased.
BASIC
A common programming language. BASIC Units are programmed in BASIC.
basic instruction
A fundamental instruction used in a ladder diagram. See advanced instruction.
BASIC Unit
A CPU Bus Unit used to run programs in BASIC.
baud rate
The data transmission speed between two devices in a system measured in
bits per second.
BCD
Short for binary-coded decimal.
binary
A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 2, i.e., numbers
are written using only 0’s and 1’s. Each group of four binary bits is equivalent
to one hexadecimal digit. Binary data in memory is thus often expressed in
hexadecimal for convenience.
163
Glossary
binary-coded decimal
A system used to represent numbers so that every four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one decimal digit.
bit
The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
and OFF. A bit represents one binary digit. Some bits at particular addresses
are allocated to special purposes, such as holding the status of input from external devices, while other bits are available for general use in programming.
bit address
The location in memory where a bit of data is stored. A bit address specifies
the data area and word that is being addressed as well as the number of the
bit within the word.
Branching Link Adapter
A Link Adapter used to branch connections to Units in a Link System used either to prevent the entire System from shutting down for an interruption at only
one point in the System, or to enable connecting more than two Units in one
System when each Unit provides only one connector.
buffer
A temporary storage space for data in a computerized device.
building-block PLC
A PLC that is constructed from individual components, or “building blocks.”
With building-block PLCs, there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable
as a PLC. The PLC is rather a functional assembly of Units.
bus
A communications path used to pass data between any of the Units connected
to it.
bus link
A data link that passed data between two Units across a bus.
byte
A unit of data equivalent to 8 bits, i.e., half a word.
central processing unit
A device that is capable of storing programs and data, and executing the instructions contained in the programs. In a PLC System, the central processing
unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external
devices, etc.
channel
See word.
character code
A numeric (usually binary) code used to represent an alphanumeric character.
checksum
A sum transmitted with a data pack in communications. The checksum can be
recalculated from the received data to confirm that the data in the transmission
has not been corrupted.
CIM
Computer integrated manufacturing; a process where one or more computers
are used to control and integrate manufacturing processes.
CIO Area
A memory area used to control I/O and to store and manipulate data. CIO Area
addresses do not require prefixes.
combined Link System
A control system that includes more than one of the following systems: Remote
I/O System, SYSMAC Link System, Host Link System, or SYSMAC NET Link
System.
common (link) parameter table
A table of settings in a SYSMAC LINK System that specifies what words are to
be used in the data links for all PLCs in the SYSMAC LINK System. See refresh parameter table.
164
Glossary
common data
Data that is stored in a memory of a PLC and which is shared by other PLCs
in the same system. Each PLC has specified section(s) of the area allocated
to it. Each PLC writes to the section(s) allocated to it and reads the sections
allocated to the other PLCs with which it shares the common data.
constant
An input for an operand in which the actual numeric value is specified. Constants can be input for certain operands in place of memory area addresses.
Some operands must be input as constants.
control bit
A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Programming Device to achieve a specific purpose, e.g., a Restart Bit is turned ON and
OFF to restart a Unit.
control signal
A signal sent from the PLC to affect the operation of the controlled system.
Control System
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PLC System, the PLC programs, and all I/O devices that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
controlled system
The devices that are being controlled by a PLC System.
CPU
See central processing unit.
CPU Bus Unit
A special Unit used with CS-series PLCs that mounts to the CPU bus. This
connection to the CPU bus enables special data links, data transfers, and processing.
CPU Rack
The main Rack in a building-block PLC, the CPU Rack contains the CPU, a
Power Supply, and other Units. The CPU Rack, along with the Expansion CPU
Rack, provides both an I/O bus and a CPU bus.
C-series PLC
Any of the following PLCs: C2000H, C1000H, C500, C200H, C40H, C28H,
C20H, C60K, C60P, C40K, C40P, C28K, C28P, C20K, C20P, C120, or C20.
CTS
An acronym for clear-to-send, a signal used in communications between electronic devices to indicate that the receiver is ready to accept incoming data.
CV Support Software
A programming package run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible to serve as a Programming Device for CV-series PLCs.
CV-mode
A form of communications usable only with CV-series PLCs. See C-mode.
CV-series PLC
Any of the following PLCs: CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1
CVSS
See CV Support Software.
cycle
One unit of processing performed by the CPU, including SFC/ladder program
execution, peripheral servicing, I/O refreshing, etc. The cycle is called the scan
with C-series PLCs.
cycle time
The time required to complete one cycle of CPU processing.
data area
An area in the PLC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data.
data length
In communications, the number of bits that is to be treated as one unit in data
transmissions.
data link
An automatic data transmission operation that allows PLCs or Units within
PLCs to pass data back and forth via common data areas.
165
Glossary
data link area
A common data area established through a data link.
data link table
A table of settings kept in memory that specifies what words are to be part of
a data link for all PLCs involved in the link.
data register
A storage location in memory used to hold data. In CV-series PLCs, data registers are used with or without index registers to hold data used in indirect addressing.
data sharing
An aspect of SYSMAC Link Systems and SYSMAC NET Link Systems in
which common data areas or common data words are created between two or
more PLCs.
data transfer
Moving data from one memory location to another, either within the same device or between different devices connected via a communications line or network.
debug
A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended.
Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors, as well as the fine-tuning of timing and coordination of control operations.
decimal
A number system where numbers are expressed to the base 10. In a PLC all
data is ultimately stored in binary form, four binary bits are often used to represent one decimal digit, via a system called binary-coded decimal.
decrement
Decreasing a numeric value, usually by 1.
default
A value automatically set by the PLC when the user does not specifically set
another value. Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the application of power.
delimiter
A code sent during communications between devices to indicate the end of the
current transmission, but not the end of the entire transmission. See terminator.
destination
The location where an instruction places the data on which it is operating, as
opposed to the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction. The
location from which data is taken is called the source.
digit
A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits.
DIP switch
Dual in-line package switch, an array of pins in a signal package that is mounted to a circuit board and is used to set operating parameters.
distributed control
A automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system
is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized and ‘distributed’ over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to
PLC Systems.
DM Area
A data area used to hold only word data. Words in the DM area cannot be accessed bit by bit.
DM word
A word in the DM Area.
downloading
The process of transferring a program or data from a higher-level or host computer to a lower-level or slave computer. If a Programming Device is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
166
Glossary
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which
stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a
special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without
having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is mounted.
electrical noise
Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage,
current, and data, which might interfere with the normal operation of a device.
EM Area
Extended Data Memory Area; an area that can be optionally added to certain
PLCs to enable greater data storage. Functionally, the EM Area operates like
the DM Area. Area addresses are prefixes with E and only words can be accessed. The EM Area is separated into multiple banks.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which stored
data can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.
error code
A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists, and something about
the nature of the error. Some error codes are generated by the system; others
are defined in the program by the operator.
even parity
A communication setting that adjusts the number of ON bits so that it is always
even. See parity.
event processing
Processing that is performed in response to an event, e.g., an interrupt signal.
Expansion CPU Rack
A Rack connected to the CPU Rack to increase the virtual size of the CPU
Rack. Units that may be mounted to the CPU Backplane may also be mounted
to the Expansion CPU Backplane.
Expansion I/O Rack
A Rack used to increase the I/O capacity of a PLC. In CV-Series PLCs, either
one Expansion I/O Rack can be connected directly to the CPU or Expansion
CPU Rack or multiple Expansion I/O Racks can be connected by using an I/O
Control and I/O Interface Units.
FA
Factory automation.
factory computer
A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.
fatal error
An error that stops PLC operation and requires correction before operation can
continue.
FCS
See frame checksum.
FINS
See CV-mode.
flag
A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of
operating status. Some flags, such as the carry flag, can also be set by the operator or via the program.
force reset
The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device. Bits are
usually turned OFF as a result of program execution.
force set
The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device. Bits are
usually turned ON as a result of program execution.
frame checksum
The results of exclusive ORing all data within a specified calculation range.
The frame checksum can be calculated on both the sending and receiving end
of a data transfer to confirm that data was transmitted correctly.
167
Glossary
GPC
An acronym for Graphic Programming Console.
Graphic Programming Console
A programming device with advanced programming and debugging capabilities to facilitate PLC operation. A Graphic Programming Console is provided
with a large display onto which ladder-diagram programs can be written directly in ladder-diagram symbols for input into the PLC without conversion to mnemonic form.
handshaking
The process whereby two devices exchange basic signals to coordinate communications between them.
header code
A code in an instruction that specifies what the instruction is to do.
hexadecimal
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16. In a PLC
all data is ultimately stored in binary form. Displays and inputs on Programming
Devices, however, are often expressed in hexadecimal to simplify operation.
Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal
digit.
host interface
An interface that allows communications with a host computer.
Host Link System
A system with one or more host computers connected to one or more PLCs via
Host Link Units or host interfaces so that the host computer can be used to
transfer data to and from the PLC(s). Host Link Systems enable centralized
management and control of PLC Systems.
Host Link Unit
An interface used to connect a C-series PLC to a host computer in a Host Link
System.
I/O allocation
The process by which the PLC assigns certain bits in memory for various functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
I/O Block
Either an Input Block or an Output Block. I/O Blocks provide mounting positions for replaceable relays.
I/O Control Unit
A Unit mounted to the CPU Rack to monitor and control I/O points on Expansion CPU Racks or Expansion I/O Racks.
I/O delay
The delay in time from when a signal is sent to an output to when the status of
the output is actually in effect or the delay in time from when the status of an
input changes until the signal indicating the change in the status is received.
I/O device
A device connected to the I/O terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc. I/
O devices may be either part of the Control System, if they function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled system.
I/O Interface Unit
A Unit mounted to an Expansion CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack to interface
the Rack to the CPU Rack.
I/O point
The place at which an input signal enters the PLC System, or at which an output signal leaves the PLC System. In physical terms, I/O points correspond to
terminals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, I/O points correspond to I/O bits in the IR area.
I/O refreshing
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
168
Glossary
I/O response time
The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PLC in response to
an input signal received from an external device.
I/O Terminal
A Remote I/O Unit connected in a Wired Remote I/O System to provide a limited number of I/O points at one location. There are several types of I/O Terminals.
I/O Unit
The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
I/O verification error
An error generated by a disagreement between the Units registered in the I/O
table and the Units actually mounted to the PLC.
I/O word
A word in the CIO Area that is allocated to a Unit in the PLC System and is used
to hold I/O status for that Unit.
IBM PC/AT or compatible
A computer that has similar architecture to, that is logically compatible with,
and that can run software designed for an IBM PC/AT computer.
initialize
Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared, system
setup is checked, and default values are set.
input
The signal coming from an external device into the PLC. The term input is often
used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals.
input bit
A bit in the CIO Area that is allocated to hold the status of an input.
Input Block
A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal.
An Input Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay
can be selected according to specific input requirements.
input device
An external device that sends signals into the PLC System.
input point
The point at which an input enters the PLC System. Input points correspond
physically to terminals or connector pins.
input signal
A change in the status of a connection entering the PLC. Generally an input
signal is said to exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to
high voltage or from a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Input Terminal
An I/O Terminal that provides input points.
instruction
A direction given in the program that tells the PLC of the action to be carried
out, and the data to be used in carrying out the action. Instructions can be used
to simply turn a bit ON or OFF, or they can perform much more complex actions, such as converting and/or transferring large blocks of data.
interface
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usually involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface devices such as NSBs perform operations like changing the coding,
format, or speed of the data.
interrupt (signal)
A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be
run or other processing to take place.
Interrupt Input Unit
A Rack-mounting Unit used to input external interrupts into a PLC System.
IOIF
An acronym for I/O Interface Unit.
169
Glossary
IOM (Area)
A collective memory area containing all of the memory areas that can be accessed by bit, including timer and counter Completion Flags. The IOM Area includes all memory area memory addresses between 0000 and 0FFF.
JIS
An acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards.
jump
A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a program to another, without sequentially executing any instructions in between.
Jumps in ladder diagrams are usually conditional on an execution condition;
jumps in SFC programs are conditional on the step status and transition condition status before the jump.
LAN
An acronym for local area network.
least-significant (bit/word)
See rightmost (bit/word).
LED
Acronym for light-emitting diode; a device used as for indicators or displays.
leftmost (bit/word)
The highest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
highest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
most-significant bits/words.
link
A hardware or software connection formed between two Units. “Link” can refer
either to a part of the physical connection between two Units or a software connection created to data existing at another location (i.e., data links).
link parameter table
See common link parameter table.
Link System
A system used to connect remote I/O or to connect multiple PLCs in a network.
Link Systems include the following: SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems, SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems, SYSMAC LINK Systems, Host Link Systems, and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
Link Unit
Any of the Units used to connect a PLC to a Link System. These include Remote I/O Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
load
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PLC is called a load.
local area network
A network consisting of nodes or positions in a loop arrangement. Each node
can be any one of a number of devices. This kind of network usually operates
over a small area such as a group of offices or a factory floor.
local network table
A table that specifies all of the networks that a PLC belongs to and the unit
numbers of the Units connecting the PLC to each of these networks.
master
In a SYSMAC NET Link System, a Unit specified to manage network communications.
master number
A number assigned to a master in a SYSMAC NET Link System. This number
is different from the unit number.
MCR Unit
Magnetic Card Reader Unit.
megabyte
A unit of storage equal to one million bytes.
memory area
Any of the areas in the PLC used to hold data or programs.
170
Glossary
most-significant (bit/word)
See leftmost (bit/word).
nesting
Programming one loop within another loop, programming a call to a subroutine
within another subroutine, or programming an IF–ELSE programming section
within another IF–ELSE section.
Network Service Board
A device with an interface to connect devices other than PLCs to a SYSMAC
NET Link System.
Network Service Unit
A Unit that provides two interfaces to connect peripheral devices to a SYSMAC
NET Link System.
network support table
Tables of settings used to establish operating parameters for SYSMAC LINK
and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
node
One of the positions in a LAN. Each node incorporates a device that can communicate with the devices at all of the other nodes. The device at a node is
identified by the node number.
node number
A number used to identify a node on a network. The node number of a CV-series PLC is called the “unit number” in the PLC Setup.
noise interference
Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise.
nonfatal error
A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the
PLC from operating.
NOT
A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand. For example, AND
NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the
operand bit.
NSB
An acronym for Network Service Board.
NSU
An acronym for Network Service Unit.
octal
A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 8, i.e., numbers
are written using only numerals 0 through 7.
odd parity
A communications setting that adjusts the number of ON bits so that it is always odd. See parity.
OFF
The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present. The
OFF state is generally represented by a low voltage or by non-conductivity, but
can be defined as the opposite of either.
OFF delay
The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF (e.g., by an input
device or PLC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an
OFF signal (i.e., as no signal) by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PLC).
offset
A positive or negative value added to a base value such as an address to specify a desired value.
ON
The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present. The ON
state is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity, but can be
defined as the opposite of either.
ON delay
The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated (e.g., by an input
device or PLC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an
ON signal by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PLC).
171
Glossary
operand
The values designated as the data to be used for an instruction. An operand
can be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or
as an address to express the location in memory of the data to be used.
operating error
An error that occurs during actual PLC operation as opposed to an initialization
error, which occurs before actual operations can begin.
optical communications
A communications method in which signals are sent over optical fiber cable to
prevent noise interference and increase transmission distance.
OR
A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true, or
if both are true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/
OFF states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution
conditions.
output
The signal sent from the PLC to an external device. The term output is often
used abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals.
Output Block
A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal.
An Output Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay can be selected according to specific output requirements.
output device
An external device that receives signals from the PLC System.
output point
The point at which an output leaves the PLC System. Output points correspond
physically to terminals or connector pins.
output signal
A signal being sent to an external device. Generally an output signal is said to
exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or
from a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Output Terminal
An I/O Terminal that provides output points.
overflow
The state where the capacity of a data storage location has been exceeded.
overwrite
Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost.
parity
Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the
total is always an even number or always an odd number. Parity is generally
used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that
the number of ON bits is still even or still odd.
parity check
Checking parity to ensure that transmitted data has not been corrupted.
PLC
An acronym for Programmable Controller.
PLC configuration
The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to
form a functional PLC.
PLC System
With building-block PLCs, all of the Racks and independent Units connected
directly to them up to, but not including the I/O devices. The boundaries of a
PLC System are the PLC and the program in its CPU at the upper end; and the
I/O Units, Special I/O Units, Optical I/O Units, Remote Terminals, etc., at the
lower end.
PCB
An acronym for printed circuit board.
PLC Setup
A group of operating parameters set in the PLC from a Programming Device
to control PLC operation.
172
Glossary
Peripheral Device
Devices connected to a PLC System to aid in system operation. Peripheral devices include printers, programming devices, external storage media, etc.
peripheral servicing
Processing signals to and from peripheral devices, including refreshing, communications processing, interrupts, etc.
PID Unit
A Unit designed for PID control.
polling
The process whereby a device consecutively sends signals to other devices in
the same network to pass data back and forth, e.g., as in a data link.
present value
The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation.
Present value is abbreviated as PV. The use of this term is generally restricted
to timers and counters.
printed circuit board
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer
or electrical device.
Programmable Controller
A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and generate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory. Programmable Controllers are used to automate control of external devices.
Although single-unit Programmable Controllers are available, building-block
Programmable Controllers are constructed from separate components. Such
Programmable Controllers are formed only when enough of these separate
components are assembled to form a functional assembly, i.e., there is no one
individual Unit called a PLC.
Programming Console
The simplest form or programming device available for a PLC. Programming
Consoles are available both as hand-held models and as CPU-mounting models.
Programming Device
A Peripheral Device used to input a program into a PLC or to alter or monitor
a program already held in the PLC. There are dedicated programming devices,
such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated devices, such
as a host computer.
PROM
Programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM into which the program or
data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed from
that time on.
PROM Writer
A peripheral device used to write programs and other data into a ROM for permanent storage and application.
prompt
A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the operator.
protocol
The parameters and procedures that are standardized to enable two devices
to communicate or to enable a programmer or operator to communicate with a
device.
PV
See present value.
Rack
An assembly that forms a functional unit in a Rack PLC System. A Rack consists of a Backplane and the Units mounted to it. These Units include the Power Supply, CPU, and I/O Units. Racks include CPU Racks, Expansion I/O
Racks, and I/O Racks. The CPU Rack is the Rack with the CPU mounted to it.
An Expansion I/O Rack is an additional Rack that holds extra I/O Units. An I/O
Rack is used in the C2000H Duplex System, because there is no room for any
I/O Units on the CPU Rack in this System.
173
Glossary
rack number
A number assigned to a Rack according to the order that it is connected to the
CPU Rack, with the CPU Rack generally being rack number 0.
Rack PLC
A PLC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configuration is the most flexible, and most large PLCs are Rack PLCs. A Rack PLC
is the opposite of a Package-type PLC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage,
and control functions built into a single package.
RAM
Random access memory; a data storage media. RAM will not retain data when
power is disconnected.
RAS
An acronym for reliability, assurance, safety.
refresh
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
refresh parameter (table)
A table of settings that specifies which words in the data links for a System are
to be refreshed for a particular PLC. See common link parameter table.
relay-based control
The forerunner of PLCs. In relay-based control, groups of relays are interconnected to form control circuits. In a PLC, these are replaced by programmable
circuits.
reserved bit
A bit that is not available for user application.
reserved word
A word in memory that is reserved for a special purpose and cannot be accessed by the user.
reset
The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of
a timer or counter to its set value or to zero.
response code
A code sent with the response to a data transmission that specifies how the
transmitted data was processed.
response format
A format specifying the data required in a response to a data transmission.
Restart Bit
A bit used to restart a Unit mounted to a PLC.
restart continuation
A process that allows memory and program execution status to be maintained
so that PLC operation can be restarted from the state it was in when operation
was stopped by a power interruption.
retrieve
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PLC is called a load.
retry
The process whereby a device will re-transmit data which has resulted in an
error message from the receiving device.
rightmost (bit/word)
The lowest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
lowest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
least-significant bits/words.
rising edge
The point where a signal actually changes from an OFF to an ON status.
ROM
Read only memory; a type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A ROM
chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it and can never
174
Glossary
be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as desired.
routing table
Tables of settings that specify what networks a device is a member of and what
nodes must be passed through to reach other specific networks. See local network table and relay network table.
RS-232C interface
An industry standard for serial communications.
RS-422 interface
An industry standard for serial communications.
scan
The process used to execute a ladder-diagram program. The program is examined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in turn
based on execution conditions. The scan also includes peripheral processing,
I/O refreshing, etc. The scan is called the cycle with CV-series PLCs.
scan time
The time required for a single scan of a ladder-diagram program.
self diagnosis
A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a
warning or error if an abnormality is discovered.
series
A wiring method in which Units are wired consecutively in a string. In Link Systems wired through Link Adapters, the Units are still functionally wired in series, even though Units are placed on branch lines.
servicing
The process whereby the PLC provides data to or receives data from external
devices or remote I/O Units, or otherwise handles data transactions for Link
Systems.
set
The process of turning a bit or signal ON.
set value
The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which
an incrementing counter counts up (i.e., the maximum count), or the time from
which or for which a timer starts timing. Set value is abbreviated SV.
software error
An error that originates in a software program.
software protect
A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed
to a physical switch or other hardware setting.
software switch
See memory switch.
Special I/O Unit
A Unit that is designed for a specific purpose. Special I/O Units include Position
Control Units, High-speed Counter Units, Analog I/O Units, etc.
SRAM
Static random access memory; a data storage media.
subroutine
A group of instructions placed separate from the main program and executed
only when called from the main program or activated by an interrupt.
SV
Abbreviation for set value.
synchronous execution
Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are synchronized so that all servicing operations are executed
each time the programs are executed.
syntax
The form of a program statement (as opposed to its meaning). For example,
the two statements, LET A=B+B and LET A=B*2 use different syntaxes, but
have the same meaning.
175
Glossary
syntax error
An error in the way in which a program is written. Syntax errors can include
‘spelling’ mistakes (i.e., a function code that does not exist), mistakes in specifying operands within acceptable parameters (e.g., specifying read-only bits
as a destination), and mistakes in actual application of instructions (e.g., a call
to a subroutine that does not exist).
SYSMAC LINK System
A communications system used to create data links and enable network communications between PLCs.
SYSMAC NET Link System
An optical LAN formed from PLCs connected through SYSMAC NET Link
Units. A SYSMAC NET Link System also normally contains nodes interfacing
computers and other peripheral devices. PLCs in the SYSMAC NET Link System can pass data back and forth, receive commands from any interfaced
computer, and share any interfaced peripheral device.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
The Unit used to connect PLCs to a SYSMAC NET Link System.
system configuration
The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers
to the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed
to comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used
to describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control
System that includes one or more PLCs.
system error
An error generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from execution
of an instruction designed to generate an error.
system error message
An error message generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from
execution of an instruction designed to generate a message.
terminator
The code comprising an asterisk and a carriage return (* CR) which indicates
the end of a block of data in communications between devices. Frames within
a multi-frame block are separated by delimiters. Also a Unit in a Link System
designated as the last Unit on the communications line.
timer
A location in memory accessed through a TC bit and used to time down from
the timer’s set value. Timers are turned ON and reset according to their execution conditions.
TR Area
A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded
later for use with other instructions.
TR bit
A bit in the TR Area.
transfer
The process of moving data from one location to another within the PLC, or between the PLC and external devices. When data is transferred, generally a
copy of the data is sent to the destination, i.e., the content of the source of the
transfer is not changed.
transmission distance
The distance that a signal can be transmitted.
UM area
The memory area used to hold the active program, i.e., the program that is being currently executed.
Unit
In OMRON PLC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product sold for a PLC System. Though most of the names of these products end
with the word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
176
Glossary
unit address
A number used to control network communications. Unit addresses are computed for Units in various ways, e.g., 10 Hex is added to the unit number to determine the unit address for a CPU Bus Unit.
unit number
A number assigned to some Link Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units
to facilitate identification when assigning words or other operating parameters.
uploading
The process of transferring a program or data from a lower-level or slave computer to a higher-level or host computer. If a Programming Device is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
watchdog timer
A timer within the system that ensures that the scan time stays within specified
limits. When limits are reached, either warnings are given or PLC operation is
stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached.
WDT
See watchdog timer.
wire communications
A communications method in which signals are sent over wire cable. Although
noise resistance and transmission distance can sometimes be a problem with
wire communications, they are still the cheapest and the most common, and
perfectly adequate for many applications.
word
A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits. All data areas consists
of words. Some data areas can be accessed only by words; others, by either
words or bits.
word address
The location in memory where a word of data is stored. A word address must
specify (sometimes by default) the data area and the number of the word that
is being addressed.
word allocation
The process of assigning I/O words and bits in memory to I/O Units and terminals in a PLC System to create an I/O Table.
work area
A part of memory containing work words/bits.
work bit
A bit in a work word.
work word
A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in programming, i.e., a ‘work space’ in memory. A large portion of the IR area is always
reserved for work words. Parts of other areas not required for special purposes
may also be used as work words.
write protect switch
A switch used to write-protect the contents of a storage device, e.g., a floppy
disk. If the hole on the upper left of a floppy disk is open, the information on this
floppy disk cannot be altered.
write-protect
A state in which the contents of a storage device can be read but cannot be
altered.
177
Index
A–C
response codes
errors, 131
automatic generation of data link tables, 47
CX-Net, 9
broadcast test, 119
CX-Programmer, 9
cables
connecting transmission cables, 19
optical, 25
Optical Fiber Cables, 27
characteristics
data link, 62
coaxial cable
See also cables
communications
cables
optical, 25
data exchange timing, 64
data processing time, 65
preparations, 10
testing
broadcast test, 119
internode echo test, 118
token bus, 34
communications cycle, 34
communications cycle time, 37
data link, 62
Connectors
installation, 28
Controller Link
network
remote, 124
Controller Link Units
CS-series PLCs, 16
CS-series PLCs
installation, 18
CV-mode command set
DATA LINK START, 112
ERROR LOG CLEAR, 121
ERROR LOG READ, 120
HALT DATA LINK, 112
RESET, 112
CV-mode commands
command set
BROADCAST TEST DATA SEND, 119
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ, 119
CONTROLLER DATA READ, 113
CONTROLLER STATUS READ, 113
DATA LINK STATUS READ, 117
INTERNODE ECHO TEST, 118
NETWORK STATUS READ, 115
errors, 131
for SYSMAC LINK Units, 112–121
D
data link, 42, 86
characteristics, 62
communications cycle time, 62
controlling, 43
creating, 46
Data Link Status Flag, 56
halting, 112
precautions, 60
reading data link status, 117
refreshing, 51
starting, 112
status flags, 56
table back-up, 48
tables
automatic generation, 47
manual generation, 48
data links
automatic setting, 12
manual setting, 10
procedures, 10
data read/write services, 92
delay times, 105
dimensions
crimp terminals, 30
EC Directives, xvii
E–F
error codes, 138
error log, 137
reading and clearing, 142
table, 137
errors
clearing
CV-series PLCs
error log, 121
CV-mode commands, 131
LED indications, 128
reading
CV-series PLCs
error log, 120
flags
Network Instruction Enabled Flag, 95
Network Instruction Error Flag, 95
179
Index
frames
maximum number, 37
polled units
number, 37
handling precautions, 150
polling cycle
definition, 34
H–I
I/O tables, 11, 13
indicators
error indications, 128
inspection
tools and equipment needed, 150
installation, 10
communications cables, 27–28
connectors, 28
CS-series PLCs, 18
internode echo test, 118
precautions
general, xiii
handling, 150
replacing the Unit, 146
programming
remote, 124
R
refresh of data link area, 51
resetting
SYSMAC LINK Unit, 112
response codes, 95
M
manual generation of data link tables, 48
maximum node address, 37
maximum number of frames, 37
message service
procedure, 14
model numbers
reading PLC model number, 113
N
network
interconnecting Controller Link networks, 84
interconnecting other OMRON networks, 84
reading network status, 115
remote Controller Link networks, 124
network parameters, 35
setting, 36
response times, 65
S
specifications, 4
backup power supply, 29
standard models, 151
status
data link, 56
switches
node address
setting, 35
SYSMAC LINK System
communications, 34
features, 3
SYSMAC LINK Unit
components
C1000H-SLK11/SLK21-V1, 16
replacing, 147
number of polled units, 37
O
T
Optical Fiber Cables, 27
accessories, 27
test
broadcast, 119
internode echo, 118
optical fiber cables
See also cables
token bus communications
definition, 34
overview, 2
token cycle
definition, 34
P
PLC
reading CV-series PLC status, 113
reading various CV-series PLC data, 113
180
transmission cycle time
changing, 63
definition, 35
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W367-E1-02
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
1
Date
December 1999
02
June 2004
Revised content
Original production
“CS1 (Series)” was changed to “CS (Series)” throughout the manual where
appropriate. “User Manual” was corrected to “Operation Manual” throughout the
manual where necessary.
“PC” was changed to “PLC” throughout the manual in the sense of Programmable Controller.
In addition, the following changes were made.
Page xiii: EMI standard changed.
Page 5: Parenthetic information added to first table.
Page 6: “CS1-series CPU” changed to “SYSMAC LINK” in one place.
Page 7: Note removed.
Page 11: Changes made to notes in several places.
Page 12: Text added to fourth table.
Page 27: Changes made to model numbers in table. Note added.
Page 28: Text added to first line. Several changes and additions made to second table and text after table.
Page 32: Item 4 changed.
Page 43: Second note removed.
Page 49: Several changes made to table.
Page 55: Note changed.
Page 56: “and stopping” removed from second line of first paragraph.
Page 66: Changes made to the explanations for input and output response ON
time.
Page 67: Several changes made to table. Text inserted before “Overall Procedure”.
Page 68: Text added after itemized list.
Page 71: Several changes made to notes.
Page 72: Several changes made to captions.
Page 77: Text added before screen image.
Page 78: Text added after second screen image.
Page 84: Model numbers removed from captions in two places.
Page 86: Text added in middle of page.
Page 93: Text and tables added at bottom of page.
Page 102: Numerical changes made in several places.
Page 120: Model numbers changed in bottom diagram and text added at bottom of page.
Page 143: Section added at bottom of page.
Page 147: Model numbers changed or added in several places. Notes added in
two places.
Page 151: Changes made to first paragraph after table.
181
OMRON CORPORATION
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. W367-E1-02
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
No. 6182
OMRON Corporation
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
1
No. 6182
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
2
No. 6182
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
3
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement